racl eฺco m) h asa ent Gui deฺ: OTM 6.3 Core Competence

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM 6.3 Core
o ra uid
Competence
u tt@ ent G
n thimActivity
S tudGuide
ika this
Student
ul
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
D81894GC10
Edition 1.0
January 2013
D84946
Copyright © 2014, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You
may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be
modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share,
download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in
whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document,
please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This
document is not warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the
United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are
s a
) h a
restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Trademark Notice
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their
respective owners.
o
u tt@ ent G
Authors
nthim Stud
Julie Poindexter and Sheryl Slopey
u lika this
th ikฺh use
(kar se to
Technical Contributors and Reviewers
u tt cand
Julie Poindexter, Sheryl Slopey
e nDoug Leard
n t him ble li
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Table of Contents
OTM 6.3 Core Competence Activity Guide ....................................................................................................1-1

Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices..............1-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-4
Lesson 1: Course Overview ...........................................................................................................................1-5
Lesson 2: OTM Terminology ..........................................................................................................................1-6

Lesson 3: Navigating OTM.............................................................................................................................1-7
Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM ................................................................1-8
Practice 1 - Logging into OTM....................................................................................................................1-11
Solution – Logging into OTM......................................................................................................................1-13
Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help.............................................................................................1-14
Solution – Navigating the OTM Online Help...............................................................................................1-15
Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname....................................................................................................1-16
s a
) h a
Solution – Creating an OTM Nickname ......................................................................................................1-17
m
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources .................................................................1-
o
ecฺ eฺ
18 Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data ..................................................................................................1-
c l
ra uid
22
o
tt@ ent G
Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM ............................................................................................1-23
u
Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records .............................................................................1-25
nthim Stud Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved
ika this
Queries ..............................................................1-28 Practice 1 - Querying for
ul
kฺh use
Records ..............................................................................................................1-29
thi
Solution – Querying for Records ................................................................................................................1-
(kar se to 30
tt cen
Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records....................................................................................................1-
u
hi ble li
m 31
nt
Solution – Adding and Editing Records ......................................................................................................1-
u lika sfera 33
ik H ran
Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries ..........................................................................................................1-
rth non-t
34
K a Solution – Creating Saved Queries ............................................................................................................1-

35
Lesson 5: Setting OTM
Preferences ..............................................................................................................1-36
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business
Monitors .........................................................1-37 Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User
Preferences ...................................................................................1-39
Solution – Copying and Editing User Preferences .....................................................................................1-
40
Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences....................................................................................................1-
41
Solution – Assigning User Preferences ......................................................................................................1-
42
Lesson 6: Customizing
OTM ..........................................................................................................................1-43
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and
Menus...........................1-44 Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of
Customization ....................................................................1-47
Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts. .....................................................................1-50
Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM ..................................1-51
Lesson 8: Managing Orders inCopyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
OTM ..............................................................................................................1-52
StudentGuided
Guide Demonstration
Table of Contents
1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items ..........................................................1-
i 53
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units ..........................................................1-
55
Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments .........................................................................1-69
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments................................................................................................1-71
Solution – Planning Multi-stop Shipments ..................................................................................................1-72
Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments ................................................................................................................1-73
Solution – Mapping Shipments...................................................................................................................1-74
Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses ..........................................................................................................1-75
Solution – Viewing Order Statuses.............................................................................................................1-76
Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments ....................................................................................................1-77

Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers .............................................................................1-78
Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers....................................................................................................1-79
Solution – Changing Service Providers ......................................................................................................1-80
Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments...................................................................................................................1-81
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders .................................................1-82
Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders ....................................................................................1-84
Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments ..............................................................................................................1-85
s a
h a
Solution – Tendering Shipments ................................................................................................................1-86
)
m
Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders ..................................................................................................................1-87
o
c l ecฺ eฺ
Solution – Accepting Tenders ....................................................................................................................1-88
ra uid
Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events ............................................................................................1-
o
ttStop n t G
@ Times..........................1-90
89
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing
im tude u
t h
Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events ........................................................................................1-92
k an his S
Solution – Entering Shipment Tracking Events ..........................................................................................1-93
li
ฺhu use t
Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment .....................................................................................1-94
ik
th to
Solution – Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment........................................................................................1-95
a r
(k nse
Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments..............................................................................................1-
u t t e
96
Guided Demonstrationm
th i and lic and Shipment Information.........................................................1-97
1 - Viewing Order
e
k a n and Tracing
Practice 1 - Tracking
Solution – iTracking r a blShipments...............................................................................................1-99
Tracing Shipments.............................................................................................1-98
H u2l - Viewing
n s e Tracking Information .......................................................................................1-
fPublic
ik100 n-tra
Practice
r th
Ka Solutionno - Viewing Public Tracking Information ..........................................................................................1-
101
Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment ......................1-102
Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations ..........................................................................................1-103
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations ...........................................................................................1-104
Practice 1 - Creating Locations ..................................................................................................................1-106
Solution – Creating Locations ....................................................................................................................1-108
Lesson 17: Creating Calendars......................................................................................................................1-109
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars ..........................................................................................1-110
Practice 1 - Creating Calendars .................................................................................................................1-111
Solution – Creating Calendars ...................................................................................................................1-113
Lesson 18: Creating Contacts ........................................................................................................................1-114
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts.............................................................................................1-115
Practice 1 - Creating Contacts ...................................................................................................................1-116
Solution – Creating Contacts......................................................................................................................1-117
Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items ................................................................................................1-118
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities ......................................................................................1-119
Practice 1 - Creating Commodities.............................................................................................................1-120
Solution – Creating Commodities ...............................................................................................................1-121
Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items .................................................................1-
Student Guide Table of Contents
122 Practice 2 - Creating
ii
Items .........................................................................................................................1-124
Solution – Creating Items ...........................................................................................................................1-126
Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles .......................................................1-127
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups .............................................................................1-128
Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups....................................................................................................1-129
Solution – Creating Equipment Groups ......................................................................................................1-130
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles ..................................................................1-131
Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles.........................................................................................1-132
Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles ...........................................................................................1-133

Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles.......................................................................................1-134
Solution – Assigning Equipment Group Profiles .........................................................................................1-135
Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers ..........................................................................................................1-136
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers...............................................................................1-137
Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers......................................................................................................1-139
Solution – Creating Service Providers........................................................................................................1-140
Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts...........................................................................................1-141
s a
Solution – Adding Service Provider Contacts.............................................................................................1-142
) h a
m
Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details ................................................................................1-143
o
c l ecฺ eฺ
Solution – Adding Service Provider Contact Details...................................................................................1-146
ra uid
Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification ..................................................................................................1-147
o
tt@ ent G
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification .......................................................................1-148
u
Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification ..............................................................................................1-149
t him Stud
Solution – Configuring Contact Notification ................................................................................................1-150
n
a hi s
ik.............................................................................1-152
Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents ...................................................................................................1-151
l
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents
ik ฺh use t
u
r th..................................................................................................1-154
to
Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents ...................................................................................................1-153
Solution – Creating an Automation a
(k Agent
s e
Lesson 24: Contract Management
Lesson 25: Configuringim
utt .................................................................................................................1-155
li c en
a n th 1 - Configuring
b le Rate Distances..............................................................................1-157
Rate Distance ...........................................................................................................1-156
Lesson u k
Guided Demonstration
26:liConfiguring
f a
r Service .............................................................................................................1-159
eRate
H s
an 1 - Creating Rate Services ....................................................................................1-160
th ikPractice - tr
a r non 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload .....................................................................................1-163

K Solution – Creating Rate Services for Truckload........................................................................................1-164
Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .........................................................................................1-165
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings....................................................................................1-166
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload.....................................................................................1-168
Solution – Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .......................................................................................1-170
Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload ..........................................................................................1-171
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records .....................................................................................1-172
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload ......................................................................................1-174
Solution – Creating Rate Records for Truckload ........................................................................................1-176
Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor.................................................................1-177
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences .........................................................1-178
Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences ................................................................................1-180
Solution – Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences ..................................................................................1-181
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality.............................................................1-182
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality ...........................................................................................................1-183
Solution – Creating a Rate Quality .............................................................................................................1-184
Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality .........................................................................................................1-185

iii
Solution – Assigning a Rate Quality ...........................................................................................................1-186
Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates .....................................................................................................1-187
Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates .................................................................................................1-188
Solution – Querying for Truckload Rates ...................................................................................................1-189
Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload .........................................1-190
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles ........................................................................1-191
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records ...............................1-
192
Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records ...........................................1-194
Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings...............................................................................................1-195
Solution – Creating Master Rate Offerings.................................................................................................1-196
Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records................................................................................................1-197
Solution – Creating Master Rate Records ..................................................................................................1-199
Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries ......................................................................................................................1-200
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries ............................................................................................1-201
s a
h a
Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries .................................................................................................1-203
)
m
Solution – Creating Multi-stop Itineraries....................................................................................................1-204
o
c lecฺ eฺ
Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates......................................................................................................1-205
ra uid
Solution – Querying Route and Rates ........................................................................................................1-207
o
tt@ ent G
Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases ..........................................................................................1-208
u
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases........................................................................................1-209
thim Stud
Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items ...........................................................1-211
n
ulika this
Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items.....................................................................................1-212
kฺh use
Solution – Creating Order Bases with Line Items .......................................................................................1-215
thi
ar se to
Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases.....................................................................................................1-216
(k
Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases .........................................................................1-217
tt cen
u
Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases ................................................................................................1-220
thi ble li
m
Solution – Bulk Planning Order Releases ..................................................................................................1-222
n
lika sfera
Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops ..................................................................................................1-223
u
Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops .......................................................................................1-224
H ran
ik
rth non-t
Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops ..............................................................................................................1-225
K a Solution – Re-sequencing Stops ................................................................................................................1-227

Practice 2 - Tendering Shipments ..............................................................................................................1-228
Solution – Tendering Shipments ................................................................................................................1-229
Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider ..................................................................................1-230
Solution – Declining Tender as Service Provider .......................................................................................1-231
Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner ..........................................................1-232
Solution – Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner ............................................................1-234
Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status...................................................................1-235
Solution – Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status.....................................................................1-236
Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment.......................................................................1-237
Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data ....................................................................................................................1-238
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations..................................................................................1-239
Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations ........................................................................................................1-240
Solution – Viewing Public Locations...........................................................................................................1-241
Lesson 38: Viewing Items .............................................................................................................................1-242
Practice 1 - Viewing Items..........................................................................................................................1-243
Solution – Viewing Items ............................................................................................................................1-244
Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean........................................1-245
Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean ...................................1-246

iv
Solution – Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean .....................................1-247
Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One.......................................1-248
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One ...................................1-249
Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One .....................................1-250
Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel ...............................................................1-251
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel ........................................1-252
Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel ........................................................................................1-254
Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel...........................................................................................1-255

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel..........................................................................................1-256
Solution – Creating a Rate Record for Vessel ............................................................................................1-257
Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services ..............................................................................1-258
Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services .......................................................1-259
Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials .......................................................................................1-261
Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services.................................................................................1-263
Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record .................................................................................1-264
s a
Solution – Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record ...................................................................................1-265
) h a
Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg.......................................1-266
o m
c l ecฺ eฺ
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg ............................1-267
ra uid
Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg ..............................1-268
o
tt@ ent G
Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates ...................................................................................1-269
u
Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates...............................................................................1-270
t him Stud
Solution – Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates .................................................................................1-272
n
ikforaa Multi-leg isItinerary .......................................1-274
Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries .......................................................................................................1-273
u l t h
kฺh use
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details
i
Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itineraryh...................................................................................................1-276
t
(k ar .....................................................................................................1-278
Solution – Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary
s e to
Lesson 46: Querying for Routettand Rates .....................................................................................................1-279
Practice 1 - Queryingim
en
u licRates.................................................................................................1-280
a n thfor Routeband
leRates...................................................................................................1-281
for Route and
Lesson 47:lik
Solution – Querying
feAutoa
r Assignment Rules ...........................................................................................1-282
H u s
Configuring
th ikPractice - tr an 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules.......................................................................1-283

a r non 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules........................................................................................1-284

K Solution – Configuring Auto Assignment Rules ..........................................................................................1-285
Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases .............................................................................................................1-286
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases...................................................................................1-287
Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases ........................................................................................................1-289
Solution – Creating Order Releases...........................................................................................................1-291
Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail .................................................................................................................1-292
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail ......................................................................................1-293
Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment .....................................................................................................1-295
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments..................................................................................................1-296
Solution – Planning Multi-leg Shipments ....................................................................................................1-298
Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements ..........................................................................................................1-299
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements ...............................................................................1-300
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements ......................................................................................................1-302
Solution – Viewing Order Movements ........................................................................................................1-303
Lesson 52: Network Routing ..........................................................................................................................1-304
Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files ..............................................................................................................1-305
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File ............................................................................1-306

v
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File ..................................................................................1-309
Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV ...........................................................................1-311
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary .............................................................................1-312
Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data .........................................................................................1-314
Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File.........................................................................1-316
Solution – Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File...........................................................................1-317
Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File ............................................................................................1-318
Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File...............................................................................................1-319

Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File ........................................................................................1-320
Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File...........................................................................1-322
Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File..............................................................................1-323
Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM .......................................................................1-324
Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM ..........................................................................1-325
Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs......................................................................................1-326
Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates ..........................................................................................................1-327
s a
Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template ........................................................................1-328
) h a
m
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template ...................................................................1-330
o
l eฺc eฺ
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering.........................................................1-332
c
ra uid
Appendix C3: Working with Templates ..........................................................................................................1-334
o
tt@ ent G
Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips...............................................................................................1-
335
u
t him Stud
Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases .................................................................................1-
n
ka this
337
u l i
Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips ................................................................................................1-
338
t h ikฺh to ua Trip se......................................................................1-
( k ar se to
Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases
tt cen
339
u
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

vi
Preface
Profile
Before You Begin This Course

Before you begin this course, you should be able to:
 Explain the transport process of your company

 Understand the basics of transportation and logistics processes
How This Course Is Organized

OTM 6.3 Core Competence is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on
exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and
skills introduced.
s a
Related Publications ) h a
o m
Oracle Publications
c lecฺ eฺ
Title oraPart Number
u id
tt@ n t G
Oracle Transportation Management Administration Guide
®
u e
E38415-02
Release 6.3
n thim Stud
®
u ka Release
Oracle Transportation Management InstallationliGuide
th is E38416-02
6.3
th ikฺh use
k
Oracle Transportation Management
®
( arMigration
s e o Release 6.3 E38417-02
tGuide
u tt cTechnical
e n Architecture Guide E38415-02
Oracle Transportation Management
m i
®
Release 6.3 t hi ble l

n
u
®
lika sfeManagement
Oracle Transportation ra Branding Guide Release 6.3 E38421-02
i H an Management Data Management Guide E38426-02

k Transportation
r
h
Oracle
t
®
rRelease 6.3n- t
Ka OraclenoTransportation Management Integration Guide Release E38428-02
®
6.3
Oracle® Transportation Management Kewill Flagship Parcel Rate E38429-01
Requests Integration Guide Release 6.3
Oracle® Transportation Management Order Management Guide E38432-01
Release 6.3
Oracle® Transportation Management Report Designer’s Guide E38433-01
Release 6.3
Oracle® Transportation Management Application Scalability Guide E38434-02
Release 6.3
Oracle® Global Trade Management Oracle E-Business Suite E38425-01
Integration Guide Release 6.3
Oracle® Global Trade Management Customs Filing Integration E38424-02
Guide Release 6.3

vii
Oracle® In-Memory Logistics Command Center Administration E41869-01
Guide Release 6.3
Oracle® In-Memory Logistics Command Center Installation Guide E41870-01
Release 6.3
Oracle® In-Memory Logistics Command Center Technical E41872-01
Architecture Guide Release 6.3
OTM, GTM, and LCC Documentation Library for all 6.3.x releases: E38437-01
6.3, 6.3.1, 6.3.2, etc.
Additional Publications
 Installation ReadMe
 All of the documents listed above are available from Oracle Technology Network (OTN)
at http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/index.html.
s a

) h a
Due to confidentiality reasons, the following documents are only available via the
installer or My Oracle Support in knowledge document 796594.1:
om
 Security Guide
c lecฺ eฺ
 Data Dictionary
ora uid
 Data Dictionary Diagrams
u tt@ ent G
 Data Dictionary ReadMe
nthim Stud
ulika this
 Structural Changes Guide
thikฺh use
 External Programming Interface Guide
(kar se to
 OAM Integration Guide
tt cen
 XML Interface Changes
u
hi ble li
m
 XML Elements Dictionary
nt
u lika sfera
 XML Schemas
ik H ran
 XSD ReadMe
a rth non-t FTI ODI Interfaces Guide

K  FTI Reference Guide
 LCC Oracle Data Integrator Interfaces Guide
 LCC Reference Guide

viii
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
OTM 6.3 Core tt@Competence
n t G
imu de
Activityth Guidetu
lik an his S
1 t
ik ฺhuChapter
s e
a rth to u
u tt (k cense
nthim ble li
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices
Chapter 1 - Page 1
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Chapter 1 - Page 2
Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided
Demonstrations and Practices
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Chapter 1 - Page 3
Objectives
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Objectives
Chapter 1 - Page 4
Lesson 1: Course Overview
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 1: Course Overview

Chapter 1 - Page 5
Lesson 2: OTM Terminology
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 2: OTM Terminology

Chapter 1 - Page 6
Lesson 3: Navigating OTM
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 3: Navigating OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 7
Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM
Logging In
To log into OTM, you need a user name and a password:
1. Open a browser.
2. Go to the URL provided by the instructor.
3. Enter your User Name.

The format of your User Name is DOMAIN.USER. You can also define nicknames for each
user.
4. Enter the Password.
5. Click Login.
 At the top of the page, you can see the welcome area of OTM. This area displays
the OTM version, the user name, the user role, and links to access other areas of
OTM. s a
 On the left side of the page, you can see the OTM navigation menu. The ) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
menu provides access to all areas of OTM.
c l
) near the bottom of the menu o
ra theuinavigation
to toggleG
d
tt@ ent
6. Click the collapse button (
menu off. u
n thim Stud
l a the
iktoggle h s
inavigation
7. Click the collapse button ( ) a second time to
u t menu back on.
ikฺh use
Displays what version of
th
ar se to
OTM you are using.
Displays the user you are
(k
tt cen
logged into OTM as.
u
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
rth non-t
Toggles the Welcome area on
and off.
K a
The main menu.

Toggles the Ask Oracle
menu on and off.
Toggles the main

menu on and off.

Chapter 1 - Page 8
8. Click the collapse button ( ) to the far right of the Ask Oracle toolbar.
9. Click the collapse button ( ) a second time to display the Ask Oracle toolbar again.
The Ask Oracle toolbar provides quick access to certain information, such as rates
and locations. Can be on or off by default based on user preferences.
10. Click the Information link at the top right.
OTM displays information such as user, version, URL, and database.

11. Close the Information window.
12. Click the Help link to access help.
Help displays the OTM online help.
13. Close the OTM online help.
14. Click the Logout icon to log out of
OTM.
s a
OTM logs you out but gives you
) h a
the option to log in again.
om
15. Log back into OTM.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
At the top of the page, you can see a link for the Message Center. The Message Center is
tt@ ent G
a centralized message board that displays messages when specific events occur. The
u
him Stud
Message Center is available at the top of the OTM page.
nt
Using Online Help
u lika this
16. In the main menu, click Help > Help. kฺh se
th i
r e to u
(ka
OTM displays the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Help page. There are four tabs in
t Search,
tOTM.
the left pane: Contents, Index,
u c e ns and Glossary. The Contents tab lists menu options
e li Management > Location Manager.
himclickbShipment
and specific features of
nt l
ika sferaManagement 6.3 Help displays an overview of the Location
17. In the help window,
Oracleu lTransportation
ik H rIdentification
Manager: an tab.
th
r18. Scroll - t
nthrough the text and click on the link for Region ID.
Ka The noright-hand pane now displays regions information.
19. Click the Index tab.
20. Enter calendar in the text field.
OTM help displays index entries starting with the word
calendar.
21. Click the Search tab.
22. Enter calendar in the text field and press Enter.
OTM displays a list of those help pages containing the word calendar. You can enter
multiple words to search for. Topics with the most matches are ranked first.
23. Click the Glossary tab.
OTM displays a glossary of OTM and transportation-related terms.
24. Click the Hide Contents icon in the upper right of the help topic.
The left pane is hidden.
25. Click the Show Contents icon to display the left pane again.
The left pane is displayed.
26. Scroll down to the bottom of the left pane.
27. Click Send Us Your Comments.
Chapter 1 - Page 9
Notice the links which include:
 A link to send an email to the OTM documentation team. Use this link if you have
a question or concern with this exact help topic.
 A link to Oracle’s My Oracle Support (previously MetaLink) which you can use to
enter a service request which will be addressed by the OTM technical support staff.
 A link to find the support phone number for your region.
29. On the main menu, click Shipment Management > Location Manager.
30. At the very top of the page, click Help on the top menu bar.
OTM displays the help topic specific to this page. Since search pages are very generic,
a common topic for Search Business Objects appears.
31. In the blue bar under the title, click Search by Status.
This section of the help topic displays without you having to scroll down the page. At the
end of the topic is an up arrow that returns you to the top of the help topic. s a
32. Scroll down to the bottom of the help topic. ) h a
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
Notice the links at the bottom of the topic. These are the same links as in the Send Us Your
Comments topic. These links are on every help topic.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
u
These are just some of the features offered by the OTM online help. OTM online help is
thim Stud
very extensive. It is recommended that you refer to the help throughout the class. In a
n
ulika this
later exercise, you will see additional examples of context-sensitive help.
Creating a Nickname
th ikฺh use
You can use a nickname to log ( k r aseantoalternative to user ID. For example, a standard
aOTM
tt cens However, with a nickname, you can enter the
into
user name is comprised ofuDOMAIN.USER.
nickname instead of h
t im le li
DOMAIN.USER.
k n
a erand abAdministration > User Management > User Manager.
li
34. Click Configuration
f
35. Click
ik HuSearch
ra
atsthe bottom of the page.
n
a r36. -t the Users results page.
th OTMondisplays
K n the ID.
Click
OTM displays the User page. Note the breadcrumb trail at the top of the page (under the
blue bar above the page name). This allows you to go back without using the Back
button.
Note the nickname for this user. You can use this nickname each time you log into OTM.

Chapter 1 - Page 10
Practice 1 - Logging into OTM
Logging into OTM
Note: This training instance may be a different version of OTM than you are running at your
site.
1. Open your browser and type in the OTM URL to access the server.
Note: The URL must be in the format of
http://<servername>:7777/GC3/glog.webserver.servlet.umt.Login. Due to issues with

Windows Server 2008, you are required to enter the entire URL shown above. To make it
easier to access this URL throughout the class, it is recommended you create a favorite
in Internet Explorer.
2. Log into OTM by entering your User Name and Password.
Important: Your instructor will provide each student with your own user name and password
that allows you access to your own OTM domain.
s a
Note: Each student MUST have their own user name and password to a separate OTM
) h a
domain. There are thirty staged domains for the Core Competence class:
om
CORE101.ADMIN through CORE130.ADMIN. They all use the same password of
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
CHANGEME. Assign one domain to each student with a computer in the class. If
o
tt@ ent G
multiple students are using one computer, you should assign one domain per computer.
3. Click Login. u
OTM displays the OTM main page.
n thim Stud
u lika this
4. Click the Collapse button ( ฺh bottom
) iatkthe
u seof the main navigation
th
ar se to
menu. OTM hides the main menu.
(k
tt cen
im u li again ( ) to display the menu.
n th
5. Click the Collapse/Restore
le button
k a eonratheb top menu bar.

6. Click Information
li
OTM u
H n s
displays thef OTM Information
r th ikpage.n-tra
K a 7. n o
Enter the software
Field
version
Software Version
you are using:
Enter Your Results
8. Close the OTM Information page.

9. Click the Logout link on the top menu bar.
OTM logs you out.
10. Click the Login again to OTM link.
11. Enter your User Name and Password.
12. Click Login.
OTM displays the OTM main page.
13. Click the Shipment Management menu option.
OTM displays a sub-menu.
14. Click the Location Manager sub-menu option.
OTM displays the location search page.
15. Click the Collapse arrow ( ) next to the bottom
menu bar. OTM hides the Ask Oracle toolbar.

Chapter 1 - Page 11
16. Click the Collapse arrow ( ) a second time to display the Oracle toolbar.
You will use the Oracle toolbar throughout the class.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 12
Solution – Logging into OTM
You successfully logged into OTM and performed some actions.
Logging into OTM

Field Enter Your Results
Software Version Otmv631
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Logging into OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 13
Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help
Navigating the OTM Online Help
1. In the main menu, click Help > Help.
OTM displays the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Help page. There are four tabs in
the left pane: Contents, Index, Search, and Glossary. The Contents tab lists menu options
and specific features of Help such as Flow Topics.
2. In the help window Contents tab, click Shipment Management > Location
Manager. OTM online help displays an overview of the Location Manager:
Identification tab.
3. Scroll through the text and click on the link for Region ID.
The right-hand pane now displays regions information.
4. Click the Index tab.
s a
5. Enter calendar in the text field.
) h
6. Click on the word calendars and the sub-entries, such as activity definitions.
a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM online help only displays topics that have a keyword or sub-keyword of
calendar.
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
Note: If you do not see the entire “Type in the word(s) to search for:” field or the check box
n t
underneath it, you can expand the search pane by holding the mouse pointer over the
lika this
pane divider and then dragging the divider to the right once you see the double-sided
u
arrow.
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
8. Enter calendar in the text field and press Enter.
tt cen
OTM online help displays a list of those help pages where the word calendar appears. You
u
hi ble li
m
can enter multiple words to search for.
n t
lika sfera
9. Click the Glossary tab.
u
OTM online help displays a glossary of OTM and transportation-related terms.
H ra n
10. ik t
r th n -
Click Hide Contents in the upper right of the help topic.
noleft pane is hidden.
Ka 11. The
Click Show Contents.
The left pane is displayed.
13. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager.
OTM displays the Location Finder page; also known as
a search page.
14. Click the Help link on the top menu bar.
The help topic specific to this page appears. Since search windows are very generic,
a common search topic appears.
15. In the blue bar under the title, click Search by Date.
The Search by Date section of the help topic displays without you having to scroll down the
page. At the bottom right of the topic is an up arrow that returns to the top of the topic.
Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help

Chapter 1 - Page 14
Solution – Navigating the OTM Online Help
Navigating the OTM Online Help
You have successfully navigated through the OTM online help.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Navigating the OTM Online Help

Chapter 1 - Page 15
Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname
Creating an OTM Nickname
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Management > User Manager.
OTM displays the User search tab.
2. Click Search at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Users results page.

3. Click the ID.
OTM displays the User page.
4. Enter a Nickname. It cannot be the same as the Domain name.
Note: Enter the nickname in capital letters.
5. Click Finished.
OTM displays the results page.
s a
6. Log out of OTM.
) h a
7. Log back into OTM using your new nickname.
om
c lecฺ eฺ
You can use your nickname for the remainder of this class. You do not need to
type
ora uid
.ADMIN after a nickname.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname

Chapter 1 - Page 16
Solution – Creating an OTM Nickname
Creating an OTM Nickname
You have successfully created an OTM nickname and used it to log into OTM.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating an OTM Nickname

Chapter 1 - Page 17
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources
Viewing How To Procedures
How To procedures are a series of HTML pages which include step-by-step procedures on how
to configure certain OTM functionality. The How To procedures are written using Oracle Tutor
Author and Oracle Tutor Publisher.
The How To procedures cover the following topics:
 Outbound Multistop Scenario

 Configuring BNG
 EBS to OTM
 E1 to OTM
1. Click Help > How To.
2. Click the link for Configuring BNG.
s a
3. Click the link for Creating a New Business Number Rule Definition.
) h a
4. Scroll down to view the steps.
o m
5. Close the How To window.
c lecฺ eฺ
Viewing the OTM Documentation and Training My Oracle Supporto
ra
Notes Gu
id
u tt@ e n tThese notes
m tud Management release.
hiTransportation
There is an Oracle My Oracle Support note released for each OTM
t
release.
k n
describe the published information available for an Oracle
a hresources
i s S to learn about, install,
Use this document to ensure that you leverage all
li existing
implement, and use OTM.
ik ฺhu use t
6. Go to www.oracle.com.
a rth to
7. Click the SUPPORT link. t (k se
ut en
im leclick
8. Under Support Resources,
th licMy Oracle Support to Login.
9. Log into My n b
li ka e aKnowledge
Oracle Support.
r
10. Where
H u ns
it says f
‘Search Base’, enter the note number you want to view:
r th ik n-tra
796594.1.
Ka 12. Click
11.
n othe magnifying glass to the right of the number you entered.
Click the link for Oracle Transportation Management and Global Trade Management
Version 6.x Documentation and Training Resources.
You see the note.
The Oracle Transportation Management Documentation and Training Resources note contains
links to the following resources as well as details on how to access each of these resources:
Note: New documents can be added for any release so there may be additional documents.
 Transfer of Information (TOI) Online Training
 Oracle University Course-ware
 Oracle Transportation Management Library links for different versions.
 List of documents only available via the installer or this note.
 EBS-OTM Integration Guide
Viewing the OTM Documentation Library

Following are some of the documents included on the Oracle Technology Network page:
 Installation ReadMe

Chapter 1 - Page 18
 Administration Guide
 Installation Guide
 Migration Guide
 Technical Architecture Guide
 Branding Guide
 Data Management Guide
 Integration Guide
 Kewill Flagship Parcel Rate Requests Integration Guide
 Order Management Guide
 Report Designer’s Guide
 Application Scalability Guide:
 GTM – Oracle E-Business Suite Integration Guide
s a
13.
) h
right are included on the Oracle Technology Network page.”
a
Still in the note, scroll down to the section with the text of “The documents listed to the
om
14.
ecฺ eฺ
Click the View Library link for OTM and GTM Documentation Library Release 6.3.
c l
15. Click the Documentation tab.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
Note the list of available documents for the selected OTM release. In the top part of the
u
him Stud
page, the document names contain links to access the corresponding document. The
t
section “Confidential Documents” lists the confidential documents and does not contain
n
ulika this
links. You can access these documents via the My Oracle Support note or the installer. The
thikฺh use
confidential documents include the following:
ar se to
 Security Guide
 (k
tt cen
Data Dictionary
u

hi ble li
m
Data Dictionary ReadMe
nt
lika sfera
 Structural Changes Guide
 u
H ran
External Programming Interface Guide
ik
a rth non-t
 OAM Integration Guide
K  XML Interface Changes
 XML Schema
There are also documents for FTI and GTM
16. Close the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Documentation Library page.
Viewing the Transfer of Information Sessions (TOIs)

Transfer of Information (TOI) sessions provide information on how to set up and use
different features within OTM. TOIs are narrated slide presentations. There are two types:
deltas and comprehensives.
 Delta: These are version specific. They cover enhancements that were added to a
specific release. Often they specify what is new or different from the previous version,
including benefits of new features from a business perspective and details on product
dependencies. They are usually released within a few months of a release. These
are not updated once they are released.
 Comprehensive: These are not version specific. They are scenario-based and cover an
area of OTM. They usually cover setup and transaction. Depending on the length,

Chapter 1 - Page 19
there can be multiple parts which are designed to be taken in sequence. These are
updated periodically.
TOIs exist for OTM 5.5 GA, 5.5 CU2, 5.5 CU3, 5.5 CU4, 5.5 CU5, 6.0 GA, 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.
Even though 5.5 TOIs may seem old, there is still value in them for features that have
not changed much since.
If you have an Oracle Support contract for OTM, then you already have access to view the
OTM TOIs.
To view a list of OTM TOIs, complete the following:

17. In the My Oracle Support note, follow the link and directions to access the TOIs.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 20
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 21
Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data

Chapter 1 - Page 22
Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM
Searching
When you click on a menu option, in most instances you are automatically taken to a search
page where you can enter criteria to run a query for an existing business object or create a
new business object, such as locations, orders, rates, or service providers. For example, when
you click on the Buy Shipments menu option, OTM displays a search page.
1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments.

OTM displays the buy shipment search page.
Each tab has text fields on which you can query. Certain fields have f, l, v, and n buttons to
their right. For these fields, you can:
 f (find) – Displays a search page for a certain object.
 l (list) – Displays a list of all records for a certain object. Also, if you enter
some characters in the field and click l, OTM displays all records beginning with
s a
those characters.
h a
v (view) – Displays the view page for the record you have typed into the textm)
ฺco ฺ

field.
le

o rac utoiddoe
n (new) – Allows you to create a new object, if you have the authorization
so.
u tt@ ent G
Conditional operators, such as begins with, ends with,inot
th m null,tetc.
u dlet you further define
the criteria entered in that field.
k anthe search
i s S
The following links are available at the bottomu li of h
t page:
Search – Allows you to searchhfor
h
ฺ
ikall records e
usmeeting the defined criteria.

rt to

t (ka such
New – Creates a new object,
t n seas location, etc.
u
m you toic
l e
will display.thi
 Sort order – Allows specify the order in which the results of your search
nAllow ryou e
btol perform certain actions against the business object.
ik a a

H ul – nAllows
Actions –
s fe
th ik -tra
 Export you to export the query results to a spreadsheet.
Ka When nonayou
r2. Enter Destination Location ID of SAN.
type the first three characters of an ID, you see a listing of all possible
location IDs that begin with those characters. This feature, called auto-complete, is
enabled by a global property called glog.ui.autocomplete.
3. Select SAN DIEGO STORE.
Once you query on a location, OTM displays the results page listing all the records that
meet the search criteria specified on the query page. Unless you specify a domain in your
query, the results include all data to which you have read and write access.
At the top of the results page, you see the following links:
 New – Allows you to create a new shipment.
 View – Displays the selected record(s) in a view-only format.
 Edit – Displays the original data entry fields available for editing. Certain fields
cannot be edited (for example Shipment ID). You can only edit a record if you have
the appropriate access.
 Delete – Deletes the record.
Actions – Allow you to perform certain actions against the business object. To
the right of the Actions button, you see a drop-down list containing the following:
Chapter 1 - Page 23
 Replace Current Window – When selected, OTM overwrites the current window.
 Always Open in New Window – When selected, OTM always opens in new window.
 Always Open in Same Window – This option assumes there is one other window
that will always be the target window. If that window is currently open, upon
selection, OTM replaces the content of that window with what you click. If the
target window is not open, OTM opens a window with the new content.
At the bottom of the results list, you see the following links:
 New Query – Displays a blank search page so you can perform a different query
if the records that resulted from the original query are not what you want.
 Refine Query – Displays the search page with your original query field values
that you can change to refine the search.
 Export – Displays the selected records in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
s a
7. Select any two check boxes.
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
Note how OTM displays the number of selected records to the right of Selected.
c l
8. Select another check box.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
Note how OTM increases the number of Selected Page and Total to 3.
u
him Stud
9. Scroll to the far right in the results page.
nt
Note how OTM always displays the ID column.
10.
ulika this
Scroll back to the far left of the results page.
11.
thikฺh use
Click the Shipment ID heading once to sort the column in ascending order.
12.
(kar se to
Click the Shipment ID heading a second time to sort the column in descending order.
13. u tt cen
To resize the Shipment ID column, move your mouse pointer over the far right-side of the
thi ble li
column heading.
n
m
14.
lika sfera
When you see a || arrow similar to the one shown here, hold down the left-mouse
u
ik H ran
button and drag the arrow to the right.
a rth non-t
When you release the mouse button, the column resizes.
K

Chapter 1 - Page 24
Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records
Tips for Adding/Editing OTM Data
Throughout this course, you will be adding new data to OTM and editing existing data in
OTM. When creating new records in OTM, the following should be taken into account:
 When adding a record, the ID of the record should not contain special characters
such as periods, commas, or ampersands. Underscores can be used.
 You must go in order when completing the record and cannot skip from one tab to the
next and then back again. If you forget to input information on a previous tab,
complete the record entirely, click Finished, and then return and edit the record to add
the additional information.
 Never use the browser back button when creating a new record. Data may be lost.
If there is a breadcrumb trail in the top right, you can click a link there to go back to a
previous page.
s a
 When adding a record, always click Finished when the record is complete to save
the data. Otherwise data is lost. ) h a
o m

lecฺ eฺ
Required fields are denoted by a red *. Conditional fields are denoted by a blue * and
c
are only required if other data is present.
o ra uid

u tt@ ent G
Some data entry grids offer the ability to have multiple entries and require you to click
him Stud
a Save button after each entry. Note the Save buttons do not save anything to the
t
OTM database. You need to click Finished to save to the database.
n
 li
Make sure you only click the Finished button
u ka once,
th isOTM will attempt to
as
save multiple records if Finished is ฺh e once.
h ik s
clicked more
u
than
Adding a Record ( k art se to

utt >ceLocation
n Manager.
m
hiLocations
1. Click Shipment Management
li
a t
OTM displaysnthe
a ble Finder page.
u
2. Click New er of the page.
likat thesfbottom
i H anthe Identification tab.
kOTM displays
r
th - t
nona Location ID of DALLAS
r3. Enter
Ka LOCATION.
4. Enter a Corporation ID of
OUTLETS OF USA (already
created).
Note how OTM suggests this value
after you enter only a few
characters.
5. Select OUTLETS OF USA from the
auto-complete list.
6. Click v (view) to the right of the
OUTLETS OF USA Corporation ID.
When you click the v button, the Corporation page is displayed so you can view the
details of OUTLETS OF USA.
7. Close the Corporation page.
8. Enter a Country Code of USA.
Note the Country Code. The country code has a red * (asterisk) in front of it which means
that it is required. You will not be able to save the location if you do not have a country code
specified.
9. Click Roles at the bottom of the page. Chapter 1 - Page 25
OTM displays the Roles tab.
10. Click New Location Role Profile.
12. Click Save at the bottom of the page.
OTM returns to the Roles tab.
Remember to always click Finished to save your new record. Note the Save buttons do
not save anything to the database.
Editing a Record
14. Enter a Location ID of DALLAS.

16. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Identification tab. You can edit the information except in those fields that
are grayed out.
You cannot edit the Location ID. If you need to change it, copy the existing location, enter
the desired Location ID, and delete the original location record.
s a
17. Click the Help link on the top menu bar.
) h a
om
The OTM online help is context sensitive. The OTM online help page displays information
about the Location Manager: Identification tab.
c lecฺ eฺ
18. Close the OTM online help. o ra uid
19. Click the Roles tab.
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
u lika this
th ikฺh use
21. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
( k ar se to
tt cen
u
hi ble li
m
23. At the top of the page, click Finished to save the record.
n t
lika sfera
OTM displays the confirmation page.
u
H ran
ik
Using SmartLinks
-t to view additional information about business objects. These shortcuts are
th hasoshortcuts
a rOTM n
K callednSmartLinks.
OTM displays the buy shipment search page.
26. Right-click on a row in the Buy Shipments results page.
A SmartLink is an OTM menu listing shortcuts to related information for that
business object. In this example, you can see the available SmartLinks for buy
shipments.
The Edit, Export, and View options appear on all SmartLink menus.
27. Close the SmartLinks menu.
Using Actions
Actions allow you to perform certain functions against a business object.
28. Select the check box to the left of a shipment.
29. Click Actions at the top of the results page.
30. Click the plus sign (+) next to Shipment Management.

Chapter 1 - Page 26
31. Click the plus sign (+) next to Tender.
You will use some of these options in the practices throughout the class.
32. Close the Actions menu.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 27
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries
Creating and Running a Saved Query
You can create saved queries for searches that you use frequently.
2. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC.
3. Click the Address tab.

4. In the City field, enter LONDON.
You may also enter other information such as postal code or a specific sort order.
5. Click the Role tab.
6. Select a Location Role of AIRPORT.
7. Click Save on the right side of the page near the bottom.
OTM displays the Finder – Save Query page.
s a
8. Enter a Query Name of LONDON AIRPORTS.
) h a
9. Click OK.
om
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM displays your query in the saved query list along
with any other saved queries.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
10. Click Execute Query to the right of your saved query.
u
nthim Stud
OTM displays the locations found by the search criteria
ika this
you specified.
ul
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries

Chapter 1 - Page 28
Practice 1 - Querying for Records
Querying for Records
OTM displays the Locations Finder page.
2. At the top of the page, click the Address tab.
OTM displays the address tab.

4. From the drop-down list next to City, select the
conditional operator of Contains.
OTM displays the Locations results page with all locations that have a city name containing
LONDON.
s a
) h a
6. At the top of the results page, click the Location Name header.
m
OTM sorts your results by the location name in ascending alphabetical order.
o
7. Click the Location Name header a second time.
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
OTM sorts your results by the Location Name in descending alphabetical order.
o
8. In the ID column, click the LGW ID.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
OTM displays the details for location LGW. Based on your user access rights, you are only
ika this
able to view this information.
ul
9. Scroll down and click the plus sign next to the Location Role of
thikฺh use
AIRPORT. Notice that the Location Role section is expanded.
(kar se to
10. Scroll up and click the minus sign next to Address.
u tt cen
hi ble li
Notice that the Address section is now hidden.
t m
n
11. To view the section again, click the plus sign next to Address.
u lika sfera
You can use this feature anywhere you see a plus or minus sign in front of a section
k H ran
header.
i
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Querying for Records

Chapter 1 - Page 29
Solution – Querying for Records
You successfully queried for records in OTM.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Querying for Records

Chapter 1 - Page 30
Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records
Adding a Record
2. At the bottom of the page, click New.
OTM displays the Location – Identification tab.

3. Enter a Location ID of DALLAS LOCATION.
4. Enter a Location Name of DALLAS LOCATION.
5. Enter a Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA
(already created).
In this example, the Corporation ID already exists but you can also create a
new corporation.
s a
6. Enter a City of DALLAS.
) h a
7. Enter a Province Code of TX.
om
8. Enter a Postal Code of 75200.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
10. Click Roles at the bottom of the page.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ika this
ul
kฺh use
12. Select a Location Role of
SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
thi
13.
(kar se to
Click Save at the bottom of the page.
u tt cen
hi ble li
t m
14.
n
Click Finished at the top of the
page.
u lika sfera
k H ran
OTM displays a confirmation page where you can view the location you just created,
i
a rth non-t
edit the location you just created, view a log file, create a new location, modify an
K existing location, or perform an action against your new location.
Editing a Record
15. From the confirmation page, click Edit.
OTM displays the Location – Identification tab. You can edit the information except for
those fields that are grayed out.
16. On the top menu bar, click the Help link.
The OTM online help is context sensitive. The OTM online help page displays information
about the Location Manager: Identification tab.
18. Click v (view) to the right of the Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF
USA. When you click v (view), OTM displays the details of the
corporation.
19. Close the Corporation page.
22. Select
Practice a Location
2 - Adding Role
and Editing of BILL TO.
Records
23. Click Save at the bottom of the page. Chapter 1 - Page 31
OTM returns to the Roles tab. Notice you now have two location roles defined for
this location, BILL TO and SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
24. You only want this location to be a BILL TO location. Click the trash can icon to the far
right of the location role SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
25. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete this location role profile.
OTM returns to the Roles tab with BILL TO as the only defined location role.
26. Click Finished, at the top of the page, to save the
record. OTM displays the confirmation page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records

Chapter 1 - Page 32
Solution – Adding and Editing Records
Adding a Record
You successfully added a record in OTM.
Editing a Record
You successfully edited a record in OTM.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Adding and Editing Records

Chapter 1 - Page 33
Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries
Creating a Saved Query
3. Click the Address tab.

OTM displays the Address search tab.
5. Click the Role tab.
OTM displays the role search tab.
6. Select a Location Role of AIRPORT.
7. Click Save at the bottom right of the page.
s a
OTM displays the Save Query page.
) h a
8. Enter a Query Name of AIRPORTS.
om
9. Click OK.
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM returns to the Locations Finder ora uid
page.
u tt@ ent G
Your new query now appears in the
nthim Stud
ika this
Saved Query drop-down list at the bottom
of the page. ul
thikฺh use
10. Click Execute Query at the bottom right
of the page.
(kar se to
u tt cen
OTM displays the Locations results page containing a list of locations based on the
thi ble li
m
query you just defined.
n
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries

Chapter 1 - Page 34
Solution – Creating Saved Queries
Creating a Saved Query
You successfully created a saved query in OTM.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Saved Queries

Chapter 1 - Page 35
Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 36
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors
Creating Saved Queries
To set up a Business Monitor, you first need to define the saved queries you wish to include in
the Business Monitor.
1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release.
2. Click the Saved Query ID drop-down list to see all order release saved queries.
If you do not see the queries you need, you can create them. Your Business Monitor can
include saved queries from different business objects.
Viewing a Business Monitor

Assign these queries to your Business Monitor ID.
3. Click Configuration and Administration > Preferences > Manage Business Monitors.
4. Enter a Business Monitor ID of CORECOMPETENCE.
s a
) h a
o m
ecฺ eฺ
6. Click the ID.
c l
ra uid
 Note Refresh Interval (minutes). You can define a refresh interval that controls how
o
often the active Business Monitor refreshes the values in the Number of Matching
and the Number of Previously Matching columns.
u tt@ ent G
 Note the Sequence Number. The sequence number
displays the results of these queries in thea n thimdefines
S tuindwhat order OTM
u l
Business
th is object that you want
ik the business
Monitor.

th ikฺh use
Note the Query ID. The query ID represents
to monitor.
Note the Saved Query(ID. k r saved
aThe e o ID gets executed when you launch the
tquery

Business Monitoru orttwhen the e n s
i
saved queryhthatm was e li c refresh interval expires. Make sure you choose a
a n t bl
created for the business object that you selected in the query
k
ID field.
i ra
ul thenScreen
 HNote s fe Set ID. The screen set ID controls the display attributes of the
r th n - trapage that appears when you click any of the results in the Business Monitor.
ik results
Ka  noYou then assign the Business Monitor to a user preference.
Assigning User Preference
To activate your user preference, assign the user preference to a specific user.
7. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manage User Access.
8. Select a User Access Type of User Preference.
9. Enter a User ID of ADMIN.
10. Click Edit User Access at the bottom of the page.
11. Ensure that the Replace Existing User Preference With The Following check box
is selected.
12. Enter a User Preference of COREDEMO.
13. Click Finished at the top of the page.
14. Log out of and back into OTM.
Viewing the Business Monitor

You can then see your important saved queries in one place.
15. Click the Business Monitor link at the top of the page.

Chapter 1 - Page 37
OTM displays the Business Monitor page containing your defined saved queries.
You can quickly see the number of:
 Order bases which are not available for planning (ORDER BASE – NO
RELEASES)
 Orders which are ready to be planned into shipments (ORDER RELEASE-
NEW)
 New shipments (SHIPMENT-NEW)
 Shipments with delayed events entered against them (SHIPMENT-

DELAYED)
16. Click on any number in the Number of Matching column.
OTM displays the records matching your query in the Business Monitor.
17. Close the results page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 38
Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences
Copying and Editing a User Preference
1. Click Configuration and Administration > Preferences > User Preferences.
OTM displays the user preferences results page.
3. Select the check box next to CORECOMPETENCE.

4. Click Copy User Preference.
OTM displays the User Preferences page.
5. Enter a User Preference ID of STUDENT.
6. In the Preference section, select a Name of Business Monitor.
7. Select a Value of CORECOMPETENCE.
8. Click Save to the right of the Value field.
s a
) h a
om
10. Close the confirmation page.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 39
Solution – Copying and Editing User Preferences
You successfully copied a user preference with an ID of STUDENT and added a Business
Monitor of CORECOMPETENCE to it.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Copying and Editing User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 40
Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences
Assigning a User Preference
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manage User Access.
OTM displays the Manage User Access page.
2. Select a User Access Type of User Preference.
3. Enter a User ID of ADMIN.

4. Click Edit User Access at the bottom of the
page. OTM displays the User Preference Access
tab.
5. Remove the User Preference entry of
CORECOMPETENCE.
6. Type STU and select STUDENT from the resulting
s a
auto-complete list.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Log out of OTM.
ora uid
To have the Business Monitor
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
display, you must log out of OTM and
log back in again. nt
9. Log in to OTM.
ulika this
Saved Query Name
10. Click the Business Monitor link at
thikฺh use Value in Number of Matching Field…
the topORDER_BASE-NO_RELEASES
of the page.
( kar se to
OTM displays
u tt cen
the Business Monitor page containing your defined saved queries. Enter the
ORDER_RELEASE-NEW
n thi ble li
will seeSHIPMENT-NEW
m
defined Business Monitor saved queries below. You can compare these results to what you
lika sfera
in the Business Monitor later in this class.
u SHIPMENT-DELAYED
H ran
ik
th Closeonthe-tBusiness Monitor.
a r11. n
K
Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 41
Solution – Assigning User Preferences
You successfully assigned a new user preference of STUDENT to your OTM user.
Assigning a User Preference

Saved Query Name Value in Number of Matching Field…
ORDER_BASE-NO_RELEASES 1
(Note: This is an order base in the

SHAREDCORE domain that will be used
for a demonstration later in the class.)
ORDER_RELEASE-NEW 0
SHIPMENT-NEW 0
SHIPMENT-DELAYED 0
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Assigning User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 42
Lesson 6: Customizing OTM
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 6: Customizing OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 43
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen
Sets and Menus
The instructor’s domain has customized copies of the screen sets, manager layouts and
menus. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature.
In this demo, we’ll customize a Freight Forwarding manager, in edit mode, and also view a
customized screen set (finder results page). Then we’ll see how these are added to a
custom menu and the menu assigned to a user.
Viewing Custom Manager Layouts

You can use the Manager Layout Detail page to customize the manager layout on which you're
working. The manager you selected to customize is populated with the values from the original
manager layout you copied.
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manager Layout.
2. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO.
s a
3. Click Search.
) h a
4. Click FREIGHT_FORWARDING_EDIT.
om
OTM displays the Manager Layout page for the custom manager layout.
c lecฺ eฺ
5. Click the Detail tab. ora uid
@ on the
tttabs n t G
 Note the tabs across the page. These correspond to the u
im tude
Freight Forwarding manager.
th
6. Select the option button next to the INCO Terms
lik anfield.his S
OTM displays icons. With these icons, you
i k ฺhucan:use t

a r
Delete this field by clicking the thtrash can
to icon.
 (k
tt thecpencil
Edit the field by clicking e
nsicon.
u e
li field.
thimtobedit
7. Click the pencil icon
n le the
ik
You can now
l a do theerfollowing:
a
u the nfield
 HHide s f by clearing the
ik ra
a n-t it a required field.
rth  noMake
Show check box.
K
 Make it read only.
 Different types of fields will have
different options available for
edits.
8. Click the Save button.
OTM displays the Detail tab.
In this demonstration, we are going to
delete all four INCO Term fields.
9. With the INCO Terms field option
button selected, click the trash can
icon.
10. Click OK when you see the question
“Are you sure you want to delete this
field?”.
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the INCO Terms field is removed. It is
replaced by an Add INCO Terms button.
 If you wanted to add the field back, you would click the Add INCO Terms
button. 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus
Chapter 1 - Page 44
11. Select the option button next to INCO Term Location.
12. Click the trash can icon.
16. Click OK when you see the question “Are you sure you want to delete this field?”.
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the Final INCO Terms field is removed.
17. Select the option button next to Final INCO Term Location.
19. Click OK when you see the question “Are you sure you want to delete this field?”.
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the Final INCO Term Location field is
removed.
20. Click Finished.
We’ll see the results of deleting these fields of this later in this lesson.
Viewing Custom Screen Set Managers

A screen set defines how the search and search results pages look, similar to the way that
s
a manager layout configures the create/edit/view pages of a manager. a
) h a
21. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Screen Set
Manager. om
22. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO. c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
23. Click Search.
24. Click FREIGHT_FORWARDING_EDIT. u
t
OTM displays the Screen Set manager.
n him Stud
ulika this
ikฺh use
Use this page to configure the fields that you want to appear on the Search page. You can
th
(kar se to
also rearrange the sequence of the tabs and their associated fields and you can add new
tt cen
tabs and fields. You can also delete a tab or field.
u
hi ble li
m
26. Click the Results tab.
nt
lika sfera
Use this page to configure the columns that appear on the Results page of the
u
business object assigned to this screen set.
H ran
ik
rth non-t
27. In the Total Gross Weight row, click More.
K a28. Notice the Total check box is selected.

The Total check box determines if the column is to be totaled.
The Total check box is also selected for the Total Gross Volume, Total Net Weight and
Total Net Volume rows.
29. Click Save.
OTM displays the Screen Set manager again.
30. Click the Actions tab.
Use this page to configure the actions that are available for a business object. OTM is
pre- configured to display all available actions for business objects. However, you may
want to prevent a user from performing a specific action. You can also move actions to
new positions in the hierarchy.
31. Click the SmartLinks tab.
Use this page to configure the SmartLinks that are available for a business object. OTM is
pre-configured to display all available SmartLinks for business objects. However, you may
want to prevent a user from viewing a specific SmartLink. You can also move SmartLinks to
new positions in the hierarchy.
32. Click Finished.
We’ll see what this looks likeCopyright
later in this class.
© 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus
Chapter 1 - Page 45
Viewing a Customized Menu
The Menu Editor lets you control the objects that appear on the navigation menu on the left
side of the OTM home page. After you create a menu, you can assign it to a domain, user, or
level using the Access Manager. Also, note that you can assign more than one menu.
33. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Menu Manager.
35. Click Search.

36. Click CORE MENU.
The custom menu opens.
Note: It may take a while for this page to load. So please allow time for the page to
open completely.
37. Click Purchase Order.
s
Note the icons that appear. You can move this item up or down, delete it or add to it. a
38. Scroll down to the bottom of the menu. ) h a
om
At the bottom, you will see the folder Demo Screen Set and under that
c lecฺ eฺ
Freight Forwarding.
o ra uid
tt@ ent G
39. Click Finished.
u
Assigning Custom Menus to Users
nthim Stud
New user menus are not available by default. Access
u lika mustthbeisgranted to make
them active.
th ikฺh > User
u e
sConfiguration
r
40. Click Configuration and Administration
a to > Manage
tt (kof cUser se
User Access.
41. Select a User AccessuType e nMenu.
42. Enter a Usern IDth
im le li
lika erabof ADMIN.
H udisplaysnthe
43. Click Edit f
User Access.
s
th ik -tra User Menu Access page.
OTM
r n that the CORE MENU is selected.
oNote
Ka If you nmade any changes to the CORE MENU, you must log out and back into OTM to see
the updated menu.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus
Chapter 1 - Page 46
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization
The instructor’s domain has customized copies of the screen sets, manager layouts and
menus for freight forwarding. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature.
Viewing Custom Menus

First, let’s view the customized menu.
1. Scroll down to near the bottom of the main menu.
2. Click Demo Screen Set.

The OTM menu displays the Demo Screen Set and Freight Forwarding menu option
under the new group of Demo Screen Set.
Let’s look at the results of our customization.
Viewing Custom Manager Layout

Next, let’s view customized manager layout for freight forwarding.
s a
3. Scroll down to near the bottom of the main menu.
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
4. Click Demo Screen Set > Freight Forwarding.
c l
ra uid
5. Click Search.
o
tt@ ent G
6. Select the check box next to DEMO2.
7. Click Edit. u
n thim Stud
Note that there are no INCO terms fields. Normally they appear in the top section
above Order Configuration.
u lika this
ikฺh use
View the standard (non-customized) Freight Forwarding page to see the INCO Terms fields.
th
(k ar se to
8. Click Brokerage and Forwarding > Booking > Freight Forwarding.
9. Click Search.
u tt cen
thi ble li
m
10. Select the check box next to DEMO2.
n
lika sfera
11. Click Edit.
u
H ran
Note that on this non-customized manager, you see the INCO Terms fields.
ik
th othe t
-Results
a rViewing n
K Next, n Page
let’s review the customized results page (screen set).
12. Click Demo Screen Set > Freight Forwarding.
13. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO.
15. Scroll to the right until you see the columns Total Gross Weight, Total Gross Volume,
Total Net Weight, and Total Net Volume.
16. Select one or more Freight Forwarding IDs.
Note the Total row at the bottom of the results page and how the values in it change as you
select more records. OTM only displays totals for columns which have been configured to
do so.
Reconfiguring the Results Page

To be able to edit and save changes to results pages, you must have write access to your
screen sets and manager layouts.
17. Click on the wrench icon above the table to open the Configure Results page.

Chapter 1 - Page 47
s a
) h a
18. Under Selected, click Order Release ID.
o m
19. Click the Move Left arrow.
c lecฺ eฺ
20. Click Save. o ra uid
Notice that the Order Release ID column no longer appearston t@ n t Gpage.
21. Click the wrench icon to view the Configure Resultsh
u
im again.tude
the results
t page
anStatus. S
22. Under Selected, scroll down to locate and select
lik h i s
23. Click the Move to Up arrow to move k
i ฺhu touthesetopt of the column.
Status
24. Click Save.
a rth to
u
Note that the Status columntt (kis now
en sefirst column in the results page and you do not
the
th imit. le lic
need to scroll to see
ka nDirectlyrainbthe Results Page

i
ubel modified
Editing Records
s feon the results page if you have defined them to be editable in the
H
ik set.n-tra
Fields can n
r th
screen
no
Ka 25. Double-click in the Late Pickup Date column for the DEMO2 Order Release ID.
OTM displays a Late Pickup Date pop-up window. Note that the screen set must be
configured to allow editing of certain columns on the results page.
26. Enter a Late Pickup Date of next Monday.

27. Click OK.
The new Late Pickup Date appears in the results page highlighted in blue.

Chapter 1 - Page 48
28. Click the Save All Changes icon above the results page to save the newly entered value
to the database.
OTM displays the Saving… page.
29. Click Close.
The other options in the inline edit toolbar are:

 Undo All Changes - To undo all changes made to the results page since the last save.
 Mass Update - To save many changes at once.
 Configure Results – Explained above.
 Save Configuration – To save changes to the configuration of the results page.
 Print – To print the results page without exporting.
 Search Criteria – Shows the search criteria used to return the results that were
returned. Search criteria only displays if you have entered some criteria before initiating
s a
the search.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 49
Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts.
Advanced layouts enable you view data from several areas of the system on one page. For
example, you can view order releases and shipments along with a map. Advanced layouts
can be divided into multiple sections. Each of these sections are re-sizable. You can create
your own advanced layout and configure it as you want.
Optional - Viewing a Custom Advanced Layout
The instructor’s domain has a customized advanced layout. This allows the instructor
to demonstrate this feature.

If you want to see (or show) the setup for the advanced layout, complete the following:
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Advanced
Layout.
3. Click Search.
4. Click ORDER RELEASES AND SHIPMENTS. s a
OTM displays the Advanced Layout page. ) h a
om
5. In the Layout section, click Order Release
c lecฺ eฺ
Table.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
The properties pane opens on the right.
u
him Stud
Note that you can define the Screen Set ID and Population Method. For Population
nt
Method, you could enter a saved query, such as order releases for a specific region.
lika this
Viewing Results of a Custom Advanced Layout
u
ikฺh use
The instructor’s domain has a customized advanced layout added to the menu. This allows
th
(kar se to
the instructor to demonstrate this feature.
tt cen
Custom advanced layouts need to be added to your menu to be viewed.
u
hi ble li
m
6. Scroll down to the bottom of the main menu.
nt
lika sfera
7. Click Order Releases and Shipments.
u
H ran
OTM displays the Core Advanced Layout page.
ik
a rth non-t
 The map shows the routes.
K  Note the order releases on the bottom left and the shipments on the bottom right.
The following icons appear in the toolbar in each section:
 Select and Add: Allows you to find other records and then add them to the
advanced layout.
 Actions: Select a record in the table and then click this icon to launch the Actions
menu.
 Execute Default Search: Removes all the records from the table and re-runs the
finder set's default saved query.
 Refresh Selected: Refreshes the selected records in the table.
 Remove Selected: Removes the selected records from the table. It does not
remove them from the database; it only affects if they are displayed on this page.
 Export: If no rows are selected in the table, then the entire table is exported to an
Excel sheet. If rows are selected, you can choose to export just those rows, or all
rows.
 Execute: To change the saved query that is populating the data in the related table,
select one from theCopyright
drop-down list then
© 2014, Oracle and/orclick theAllExecute
its affiliates. button.
rights reserved.
Other examples 3 - of
Working with Advanced
Advanced LayoutsLayouts.
include maps and the Decision Control Center.
Chapter 1 - Page 50
Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning
Shipments in OTM
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM
Chapter 1 - Page 51
Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 52
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items
2. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO1.
OTM displays the Order Releases results page.
4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Order Release tab.

 Note the Order Release ID. If you leave this field blank, OTM generates an ID for you.
You define the rules for this in the business number generator.
5. Enter an Early Pickup Date of today’s date.
6. Enter a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months.
 Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it
is important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit
s a
time.
h
) ona
Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Locations are requiredm

o
eฺc eฺ
fields
the order release.
c l
7. Click the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE.
o ra uid
OTM displays the Order Configuration manager.
u tt@ ent G
 An order configuration determines how ship units iare
n th m created
S tudanon order bases
and releases and how calculations are to be
lik a hi s
performed when order is being
built.
e t
ฺhuconfigurations
 OTM ships with several defaulthorder ik
t usedtinothis s
u class which
that are located in the PUBLIC
domain. These include theaones
k r e are ONE_TO_ONE and
(
tt cRefer s
n to the OTM online help andif the
SHIP_UNITS. You can
im
sufficient for your u create
business.li e your own order configuration
the
default ones are not
OTM Order
th
n Guide e
l more details on order configuration.
bfor
i k a
Management
ra

H ulbetheentered
Note
n s fewith
Order Base/Release Creation field which indicates whether the order release
th ik means
will
- trathis order release
lines or with ship units. In this example, Line is selected which
a r non will be entered with lines.
K  In addition, this order configuration specifies to automatically create one ship unit
for the line item. This is specified in the Releasing Logic field.
 Note the Ship Unit Creation field which indicates that OTM will automatically create the
ship units from the entered line items when the order release saved.
8. Close the Order Configuration page.
9. Click the Line Item tab.
 To add a new line item, you can click the New Line Item button.
 Note that you can add as many line items as you need.
10. Click the pencil icon to the right of Brand Name.
 Note the Packaged Item ID of BASKETBALLS and the Total Package Count of 750.
When you are entering line items, the minimum data you can enter is the packaged
item you are shipping and the total package count.
 You can also add information such as Weight, Volume, Package Length, Package
Width, and Package Height.
OTM returns to the Line Item tab.

Chapter 1 - Page 53
12. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page.
You can specify any constraints you want to add to your order such as a particular mode or
service provider that should be used.
13. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page.
 You can specify contacts or locations with an interest in this order.
 You must enter a transport planner with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
Otherwise, OTM cannot send tender notifications to service providers.

Remember that it is only when you click Finished that OTM saves your data to the
database. Always look for a confirmation page when you create or update information.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 54
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units
1. From the confirmation page, click Modify Another. (Or navigate to Order Management
> Order Release > Order Release)
4. Click the ID.

 Note the Order Release ID. If you leave this field blank, OTM generates an ID for you.
You define the rules for this in the business number generator.
 Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it
s a
h a
is important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit
)
time.
om

l
Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Locations are required
c eฺc fields
e ฺ on
the order release.
ora uid
7. Click the Order Configuration of SHIP_UNITS.
u tt@ ent G
t m tud
hiare
 An order configuration determines how ship
k n
a performed
units
i s S on order bases
created
and releases and how calculations are u li
to be h
t when an order is being
h
ฺ
ik o us e
built.
OTM ships with several k rth
a se tconfigurations one of which is the SHIP_UNITS

(
tt cen
default order
m u
configuration used here.
i Base/Releaseli Creation field which indicates whether the order release

th
Note the Order
n
will beaentered with le
b lines or with ship units. In this example, Ship Unit is selected
li k fe r aorder
H u ns
which means this release will be entered with ship units.
8. ik
th - a Configuration page.
Close thetrOrder
r n
othe Ship Unit tab.
Ka 9. Click
n
OTM displays the Ship Unit tab.
In this example, the order release is entered with ship unit information.
10. Click the pencil icon to the right of Drop Off Stop ID.
 OTM can generate a Ship Unit ID for you.
 OTM does not require any information, but you should enter as much information
as possible to allow OTM to select the best service provider and rate.
 A transport handling unit is the type of packaging for a ship unit. It can be a 4x4
pallet, a euro pallet, or anything else you have defined. In this example, you are
shipping a count of 12 - 4X4 pallets.
 You can also add information such as gross weight per ship unit, gross volume per
ship unit, length per ship unit, width per ship unit, and height per ship unit. Net weight
per ship unit and net volume per ship unit are also available.
12. Click Line Item at the bottom of the page.
OTM creates a default line item for you. Or you can create the details for the ship unit
and the line item.

Chapter 1 - Page 55
 You can specify contacts or locations with an interest in this order.
 You must enter a transport planner with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
Otherwise, OTM cannot send tender notifications to service providers.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 56
Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items
Creating an Order Release
You are going to create an order release containing line items.
2. Click New.

3. Enter an Order Release ID of PORTLAND-SALEM.
Note: Since there are a number of date fields on the order release, make sure
you populated the correct fields.
6. Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE.
s a
7. Enter a Source Location of PORTLAND.
) h a
8. Enter a Destination Location of SALEM.
om
9. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
Because you selected an order configuration of ONE_TO_ONE which specifies creation
tt@ ent G
of line items, OTM displays the Line Item tab.
u
nthim Stud
10. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page.
ika this
OTM displays the Line Item page.
ul
kฺh use
11. Enter a Packaged Item ID of
BASKETBALLS.
thi
(kar se to
12. Enter a Total Package Count of 750.
u tt cen
hi ble li
13. Enter a Weight of 15000 LB.
t m
n
14. Enter a Volume of 1750 CU FT.
lika sfera
u
ik H ran
OTM returns to the Line Item tab of the Order
a rth non-t
Manager.
K 16. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page to enter a second line
item. OTM displays the Line Item page.
17. Enter a Packaged Item ID of TENNIS BALLS.
OTM returns to the Line Item tab of the Order Manager.
OTM displays the Constraints tab.
23. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the
page. OTM displays the Involved Parties tab.
24. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PLANNER.
25. Select a Communication Method of BY
CONTACT.
26. Select an Involved Party Qualifier ID of
LOGISTICS.
27. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party
Chapter 1 - Page 57
Contact field.
29. Enter the ID of the order release
below: Field Enter Your Results
Order ID
30. Click the Business Monitor link. Which query has been updated after performing this
exercise?
Saved Query Name Number of Matching
31. Close the Business Monitor page.

s a
Enter a second order release also containing line items.
) h a
m
32. From the confirmation page, click Create Another. (Or navigate to Order Management
o
> Order Release > Order Release)
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
33. Enter an Order Release ID of PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ika this
u l
kฺh use
Note: Since there are a number of date fields on the order release, make sure
you populated the correct fields.
t hi
(kar se to
u tt cen
hi ble li
37. Enter a Source Location of PORTLAND.
t m
n
38. Enter a Destination Location of TILLAMOOK.
u lika sfera
ik H ran
OTM displays the Line Item tab.
a th ClickoNew
r40. n -t Line Item in the middle of the page.
K n
OTM displays the Line Item page.
41. Enter a Packaged Item ID of GOLF BALLS.
48. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PLANNER.
49. Select a Communication Method of BY
CONTACT.
50. Select an Involved Party Qualifier ID of
LOGISTICS. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
51.
Practice 1 - Creating Order Releasesof
Click Save to the far right withthe Involved
Line Items Party
Contact field. Chapter 1 - Page 58
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 59
Solution – Creating Order Releases with Line Items
You successfully created two order releases: one with an ID of PORTLAND-SALEM and a
second with an ID of PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK.
The business monitor displays one updated query:

ORDERRELEASE_NEW 1
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Order Releases with Line Items

Chapter 1 - Page 60
Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 61
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses
4. Mark one of the check boxes.
5. Click View at the top of the page.

OTM displays the Order Release view page.
6. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top.
OTM displays the Statuses page.
Statuses tell you what has happened to this business object up until this point. This is a
new order release, so all the values are set to their default. These values change as the
business object moves through various processes in OTM.
s a
h a
 Note the Status Value of PLANNING_NEW. This indicates there are no shipments
)
built yet for this order release.
om
lecฺ eฺ
 Note the Status Value of ORDER MODIFIED_NO MODIFICATION. This indicates
c
ra uid
that the order base associated with this order release is the same as when the
o
order bases are updated. u tt@ ent G
order release was built. Certain automation agents can change this value when
7. Close the Statuses page.

nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 62
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses
Viewing the Order Release Status
3. Mark the check box next to PORTLAND-SALEM.

6. Enter the Status Value for the Status Type listed
below:
Status Status Value
s a
Type
) h a
PLANNING om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
utt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 63
Solution – Viewing Order Release Statuses
For the order release:
Status Status Value
Type
PLANNING PLANNING_NEW
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Order Release Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 64
Lesson 10: Planning Shipments
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 10: Planning Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 65
Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments
Planning a Multi-stop Shipment
Based on your search criteria, OTM displays two order releases.

4. Mark both check boxes.
5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Multi-stop.
You can select other actions such as Bulk Plan – Buy or Direct to let OTM decide how best
to build shipments.
You see the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
Note the View Diagnostics button. This button is not available by default, but it can
s a
be added by selecting Diagnostic Log in the user preferences.
) h a
6. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the View Diagnostics
o m
button. OTM displays the Diagnostics Log Viewer.
c lecฺ eฺ

o ra uid
The Diagnostic Log Viewer page opens and displays process steps, entities, duration
tt@ ent G
and status, so you can see the sequence of events and whether they were
u
him Stud
successful.

n t
Two of the statuses are Success and Failure. Remember that these are process
lika this
statuses and Success may not always be good nor may Failure always be bad. For
u
th ikฺh use
example, the message may be Success for bundling orders but you may not want
ar se to
them bundled.
 (k
tt cen
Processes vary depending on the process performed. For example, for building
u
hi ble li
m
shipments, some of the processes you will see are: identify valid itineraries, multi-stop
t
merge shipments, and commit shipments.
n
 likais asplus
If there
u f a you can click on it to view sub-process steps.
erbutton,
ik H downraand
7. Scroll n note the Process Step of Multi Stop – Merge Shipments.
rth  noThe t
n- status of this process steps indicates that the number of shipments to merge is
K a 2 and that using the “Concurrent Savings Merge” algorithm that these shipments
have been combined into 1 shipment.
8. Click the plus button next to Multi Stop – Merge Shipments.
 Note that several new entries appear under Multi Stop – Merge Shipments.
 You see the details for the Multi Stop stats process.
 And finally you see the Commit Shipments process completed successfully. This
indicates that the shipment was successfully saved to the database.
9. Close the Diagnostics Log Viewer page.
10. Click the Shipment ID on the Build Buy Shipment confirmation
page. OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page.
 OTM generates the shipment ID using rules defined in the
business number generator.
 Note the service provider and transport mode for the shipment.
 Note the Number Of Orders and Number Of Stops. There were two orders, DEMO1
and DEMO2 planned into this single multi-stop shipment. The shipment has three stops.
11. Click the plus sign next to More.
OTM displays additional shipment information including:
Chapter 1 - Page 66
 Cost information for the shipment such as Total Actual Cost, Total Weighted Cost, and
Planned Cost.
 Start Time and End Time for the shipment. OTM calculates the time window identifying
the earliest, best, and latest start time and end time for a shipment.
 Parameter Set ID used for planning the shipment.
 Itinerary used to build the shipment.
 Utilization bars for the weight and volume.

12. Click the Parameter Set ID of DEFAULT.
OTM displays the Parameter Set page.
This is the default planning parameter set
that is delivered with OTM.
Parameter sets are used to control the way OTM builds and modifies shipments. They
can be specified from some action pages or they can be set to default values based on
either user preferences or domain settings.
s a
) h a
To set them at the domain level via domain settings, you can go to Configuration and
om
ecฺ eฺ
Administration > Domain Management > Domain Settings.
c l
ra uid
13. Close the Parameter Set page.
o
tt@ ent G
14. Click the shipment ID to view the shipment again.
u
15. Scroll down and click the plus sign next to the Shipment Equipment ID.
nthim Stud
OTM displays more details about the equipment used for this shipment including
lika this
total weight, total volume, and ship unit data.
u
ikฺh use
16. Scroll down to the bottom of the Buy Shipment view page.
th
(kar se to
OTM displays shipment stop information including all stops included in the shipment. For
tt cen
each stop, you can see the stop type, location, and planned arrival and departure
u
hi ble li
m
information.
nt
17. Click the plus sign next to Standard Documents.
u lika sfera
This section contains standard documents associated with the shipment. A standard
ik H ran
document is an assignment of a document type to a transaction, such as a
a rth non-t
shipment. Revisions are kept of standard documents.
K Refer to the OTM Transfer of Information session titled 6.3 TOI OTM Document
Management Functional Overview for more information on document set up, generation,
and flow.
18. Click the plus sign next to Additional Documents.
This section displays document uploads and reports directly associated with the shipment
by a user or through integration. Documents can be associated with the shipment through
the Attach Document or the Upload Document actions. Ad hoc documents are
documents without a document type that are associated with the shipment.
Viewing Diagnostics Log Files from OTM Menus

If you close the shipment confirmation page and want to go back at a later time and view
a diagnostic log file, you can do this via the Process Management menus.
19. Go to Operational Planning > Process Management > Diagnostics >
View Diagnostics.
20. Click f (find) next to the Diagnostic Log File ID field.
OTM displays the Diagnostic Log File Finder page.
21. Enter a Start Time of today’s date.

Chapter 1 - Page 67
22. Click Search.
OTM displays the Diagnostic Log File search results page.
23. Select a log file to view.
In this example, there is only one file listed and it is selected by default.
24. Click Finish at the top of the page.
OTM displays the View Diagnostics process management page with the ID you selected.
25. Click View Results to view the diagnostic log file.

OTM displays the diagnostic log for the shipment you created earlier in this demonstration.
26. Close the Diagnostic Log Viewer page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 68
Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments
Mapping Your Shipment
1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Map >
Map Shipments.
Click the Legend icon
to view or hide the
legend.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
You can zoom in and
out and maneuver the
n t
ika this
map.
u l
th ikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
You can see shipment information at the bottom of
lika sfera
the page. You can also select and run saved
queries.
u
H ran
ik -t
a r2.th Zoom
on
n the Legend icon located in the right side of the icon bar.
K 3. Click in as necessary.
OTM displays the Legend.

 For more information about the icons listed in the legend, please refer to the
OTM online help topic glog.map Properties.
4. Close the Map Shipments page.
5. Close the Buy Shipment view page.
6. Close the Build_Buy_Shipment page.
Viewing the Order Status

10. Mark the check box next to DEMO1.

Chapter 1 - Page 69
The status value of PLANNING_PLANNED - FINAL indicates this order release has been
successfully planned onto a shipment.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 70
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments
3. Mark the check box next to both the PORTLAND-SALEM and PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK
order releases.
4. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Multi-
stop. OTM displays the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
5. If you see the Ignore the Following Constraints page, make sure that nothing is
selected and click OK.
6. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the View Diagnostics button.
s a
7. Enter the status information for the following process step:
) h a
Process Step Enter the Status…
om
Identify Valid
c lecฺ eฺ
Itineraries ora uid
8. Close the Diagnostic Log Viewer page. u tt@ ent G
9. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, clickth imShipment
the tud
n
ka mode.
ID. OTM displays the Buy Shipment page in iview is S
ul th
th ikฺh use
ar sebelow:
11. Enter the following shipment information
(k to
Field utt e n Enter Your Results…
m
hIDi ble li c
n
Shipment t
u lika Provider
Service
s f era
ik H ID ran
a rth nonTotal -t Actual Cost
K
Rate Offering
Rate Record
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 71
Solution – Planning Multi-stop Shipments
You successfully viewed the diagnostics log and saw the following information:
Process Step Enter Your Results…
Identify Valid Success
Itineraries Found 1 Itineraries.

itinerary 1: SHAREDCORE.OR MULTISTOP
You successfully created a multi-stop shipment with the following information:

Field Enter Your Results…
Shipment ID 01000
s a
Service Provider FGN9
) h a
ID om
c lecฺ eฺ
Total Actual Cost 605.00 USD
ora uid
Rate Offering ID FGN9 TL
u tt@ ent G
Rate Record ID FGN9 OR
nthim Stud
ulika this
th ikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Planning Multi-stop Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 72
Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments
Mapping Shipments
1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Map >
Map Shipments.
2. Zoom in as necessary.
Click the Legend icon

to view or hide the
legend.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
You can zoom in and
n thim Stud
out and maneuver the
map.
u lika this
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
lika sfera
You can see shipment information at the bottom of
u
H ran
the page. You can also select and run saved
ik queries.
a rth non-t
K 3. Click the Legend icon in the toolbar at the top of the map.
OTM displays the Legend.
4. Close the Map view page.
5. Close the Shipment View page.
6. Close the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
7. Click Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Which query has been updated
after performing this exercise?
Saved Query Name Number of Matchings…
8. Close the Business Monitor

page.
Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 73
Solution – Mapping Shipments
Mapping Shipments
You successfully mapped your shipment in OTM.
The business monitor displays one updated query:
SHIPMENT-NEW 1
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Mapping Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 74
Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses
3. Mark the check box next to PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK.

5. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. Enter the status value for the
status type listed below:
Status Type Status Value
PLANNING
s a
6. Close the Statuses page. ) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
utt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 75
Solution – Viewing Order Statuses
Your status is as follows:
PLANNING PLANNING_PLANNED – FINAL
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Order Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 76
Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 77
Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers
Changing Service Provider
2. Click the Order Release tab.

OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page.
5. Mark the check box next to the ID.
6. Click Actions > Shipment Management.
Note the different options under Shipment Management. You can change details such as
service provider, costs, and stops.
7. Click Change Service Provider > Change Service Provider.
s a
) h a
OTM displays valid service provider options for the chosen shipment.
m
Note the following check boxes at the top of the page:
o
 lecฺ eฺ
The Allow Alternate Equipment check box allows you to change the equipment to
c
ora uid
a different valid available piece of equipment, if one is available.

tt@ ent G
Use the Allow Alternate Mode check box to change to a valid alternate transport
u
him Stud
mode.
nt
ika this
 Use the Allow Infeasible Service Time check box to allow service times to be early
ul
or late for order pickups and drop offs. There must still be a valid time window.
thikฺh use
In the Rate Preferences drop-down, you can specify whether to use preferred rates or
kar se to
not. We will discuss preferred rates later in this class.
(
u tt cen
Note the Status. If a service provider can be used for this shipment, it has a status of
hi ble li
m
Available. The service provider currently assigned to the shipment has a status of Available
nt
lika sfera
(Current).
u
In the grid, you see shipment details such as rate offering, cost, start and end time for
H ran
ik
r8.th non-t
each service provider.
a
K 9. If you change any of these options, click the Refresh button to update the grid.
Note the Analyze Carrier Scorecard button. This button can only be used if Oracle
Fusion Transportation Intelligence (FTI) is installed. FTI is not installed on the training
server, so this button will not work.
10. Mark the option button next to the Service Provider ID NW99.
11. Click OK.
OTM displays the shipment data for the new service provider.
Note the service provider has been changed from FGN9 to
NW99.
12. Click the Shipment ID.
OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page.
Note the Total Actual Cost is different from the Planned Cost. The planned cost is the
original OTM calculated cost of the shipment and does not change. The total actual
cost reflects the current service provider and associated rates.
15. Close the Change Service Provider page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers

Chapter 1 - Page 78
Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers
You just found out that the Forest Green Trucking drivers went on strike this morning. You need
to manually change the service provider on the shipment you just created.
Changing the Service Provider


3. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created.
4. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Service Provider > Change
Service Provider.
OTM displays the Service Providers page. OTM displays all available service providers
along with the shipment information if you were to select that service provider.
s
Note that the Available service provider of FGN9 is the current service provider. a
5. Mark the option button next to the Service Provider ID of NW99. ) h a
om
6. Click OK.
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
OTM displays the shipment data after the service provider change.
o
7. Click the shipment ID to view additional shipment data.
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
n t
ikaEnterthYour
9. Enter the following shipment information below:
ul is Results…
kฺh use
Field
th i
Service Provider ID
Total Actual Cost tt (k
ar se to
u c e n
t m
hi ble
Rate Offering li
n
u likaRecord
Rate
s fera
ik H Planned
ran Service
th - t
r nonProvider
Ka Planned Cost
Planned Rate
Offering
Planned Rate
Record
11. Close the Change Service Provider page.
Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers

Chapter 1 - Page 79
Solution – Changing Service Providers
Changing the Service Provider
Note the following data on the shipment after the service provider has been changed:
Service Provider ID NW99

Rate Offering NW99 TL
Rate Record NW99 OR
Planned Service FGN9
Provider
Planned Cost 605.00 USD
s a
Planned Rate FGN9 TL ) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
Offering
c l
Planned Rate FGN9 OR
ora uid
tt@ ent G
Record
u
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
utt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Changing Service Providers

Chapter 1 - Page 80
Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 81
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting
Tenders
Viewing the Shipment Status

s a
) h a
 Note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_NOT STARTED. This m
o
eฺc eฺ
indicates
the shipment has not yet been tendered.
c l
 Note the status value of REVIEWED_NOT REVIEWED. This o raindicatesuithe
d
shipment has been planned but has not been approved tt@ n t
for execution.G
u e
nt him Stud
Tendering Your Shipment
u lika this
9. From the Shipment View page, click iActions
th kฺh >uShipment
se Management > Tender >
r
a se to
(kaction
Secure Resources.
u
Using the Secure Resourcest t e ntriggers the one-step tendering process.
h im li c
Note the Analyze
n t Tender
b e
Performance
l button. This button can only be used if Oracle
lik a button
Fusion Transportation
e rawill
Intelligence (FTI) is installed. FTI is not installed on the training
so this f
Huthe IDraonnsthe Secure Resources page.
server, not work.
10. ik
a rth OTM
Click
o n -t
n Status on the right side of the page near the top.
K 11. Click displays the Shipment View page.

Note the status value of REVIEWED_EXECUTE. This indicates the shipment is reviewed
and may be executed. Also note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED
which indicates the shipment has now been tendered to the service provider.
14. Close the Secure Resources page.
Accepting Your Tender

15. From the Buy Shipment view page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender.
 The carrier can log into OTM, in their own domain, to respond to your tender. You, as a
transport planner, can also do it for them. For example, you might call them to get a
quick reply and then update OTM.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 82
 If, for some reason, the carrier does not receive your tender notification, you can
send it again with the Re-Transmit Tender action. In this example, you are accepting
the tender for the service provider.
16. Click Accept Tender.
OTM displays the Accept This Shipment page.
17. On the Accept this Shipment Page, note the following:
 Note the Pickup Date Time near the bottom of the page.
 You can enter reference numbers and remarks.

18. Click Finished at the bottom of the page to accept the tender.
19. Close the Results page.
20. In the navigation trail at the top of the page, click the Buy Shipments Result
link. OTM displays the Buy Shipments finder results.
21. Click the ID of the shipment for which you just accepted the tender.
s a
) h a
om
lecฺ eฺ
Note the status value of REVIEWED_EXECUTE which indicates the shipment is reviewed
c
ra uid
and may be executed. Also note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED
o
tt@ ent G
which indicates the shipment has now been accepted by the service provider.
u
him Stud
nt
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 83
Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders
Tendering Your Shipment

6. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Open Tender.
You can send, modify, re-transmit, or withdraw your broadcast tender and/or spot bid
tender.
7. Click Broadcast Tender.
s a
 a
OTM only displays service providers that support broadcast tendering and are valid
) h
for this shipment.
om

lecฺ eฺ
The default response time is the latest response time of all service providers. You can
c
override the default using the Expected Response Time.
o ra uid

tt@ ent G
You can also add a Service Provider ID if one is not included in the list.
u
Once you click Submit, OTM sets the status valueim d to

t h tu
on the shipment
SECURE RESOURCES_TENDER RESPONSE
lik an his S
OPEN.
ik ฺhu use t
a rth to
u tt (k cense
n thim ble li
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 84
Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments
Viewing Shipment Status
OTM displays the Buy Shipment page in view mode.
6. Enter the shipment status values for the status types
listed below: Status Type Status Value
s a
REVIEWED
) h a
o m
SECURE RESOURCES
c lecฺ eฺ
7. Close the Statuses page. o ra uid
u tt@ nt G
Tendering a Shipment
th i m tude
8. From the Buy Shipment page, click Actions > Shipment
k S
an hisManagement > Tender > Secure
li t
ฺhushipment
Resources.
9. On the Secure Resources page, clickikthe u s e
data. OTM displays the Buy k rth
a sview to
ID to view additional shipment
t t ( Shipmentn e nearpage.
m u
10. Click Status on the right side
l
of
i c e
the page the top.
thiStatuses
OTM displays the
n b l epage.
a estatus
likshipment
11. Enter the ra values for the status types listed below:
u sf
H ranStatus Type
th ik - t Status Value
r nonREVIEWED
Ka
SECURE RESOURCES

14. Close the Secure Resources page.

Chapter 1 - Page 85
Solution – Tendering Shipments
Viewing Shipment Status
Your status is as follows:
REVIEWED REVIEWED_NOT REVIEWED
SECURE RESOURCES SECURE RESOURCES_NOT STARTED
Tendering a Shipment
Once you tender the shipment, your status is as follows:
s a
REVIEWED a
REVIEWED_EXECUTE
) h
SECURE RESOURCES SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
th ikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Chapter 1 - Page 86
Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders
Accepting a Tender
1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender >
Accept Tender.
2. Click Finished at the bottom of the Accept This Shipment page.
3. Close the Results page.
4. In the navigation trail at the top of the shipment page, click the Buy Shipments Result
link. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page.
5. Click the shipment ID for which you just accepted the tender.
7. Enter the shipment status value for the status type
s a
listed below:Status Type
h
Status Value
) a
REVIEWED om
c lecฺ eฺ
SECURE
ora uid
RESOURCES
u tt@ nt G
thim tude
lik an his S
ik ฺhu use t
a rth to
utt (k cense
n thim ble li
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 87
Solution – Accepting Tenders
Accepting a Tender
Once you accept the tender for the service provider, your status is as follows:
REVIEWED REVIEWED_EXECUTE
SECURE SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED

RESOURCES
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 88
Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Chapter 1 - Page 89
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and
Viewing Stop Times
Responsibility: Service Provider
In this demonstration, you are logging into OTM as a service provider.
Entering Shipment Tracking Events

1. Login to OTM as SERVPROV.SHAREDCORE-NW99 using password CHANGEME.

2. Click Buy Shipment Events.
3. Enter a Shipment Reference Number of YOURDOMAIN. For example,
COREDEMO.
4. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of GLOG.
OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. s a
) h a
6. Click the ID. If there is more than one shipment, click the ID of the shipment with
om
ecฺ eฺ
the highest sequential number.
c l
ra uid
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page.
o
tt@ ent G
7. Click Add Shipment Tracking Event at the bottom of the page.
u
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Event page.
nthim Stud
8. Select a Responsible Party of Carrier.
ulika this
The Responsible Party describes the person that has entered the event. The values that
ikฺh use
appear in this field are determined by the Responsible Party Profile that is assigned to
th
(kar se to
this action using the Audit Action page.
tt cen
By default, Oracle Transportation Management provides a Responsible Party Profile of
u
hi ble li
m
Carrier with a Responsible Party of Carrier that is pre-configured with all available public
nt
status and reason codes. Once you select a Responsible Party, the Status and Reason
lika sfera
fields will have specific values to choose from.
u
k H ran
9. Select a Status of Delayed and Shipment Delayed.
i
a rth non-t
This indicates what has happened.
K 10. Select a Reason of Driver Related and Driver
Related.
This indicates why it has happened.
11. Note the Shipment ID is the same as the shipment ID link that you selected on the
Buy Shipments page in step 6.
12. Select a Shipment Stop of 2. SALEM, OR, USA.
This indicates where it has happened.
13. Enter an Event Date/Time of Today’s Date at
23:30 (11:30PM).
This indicates when it has happened.
OTM displays the Results page.
15. In the navigation trail at the top of the
page, click the Buy Shipments
Result link.
16. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking
Events page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times
17. Note your newly added event in theChapter 1 - Page 90
Shipment Tracking Event History
section.
Responsibility: Transport Planner
Log into your domain to see how the shipment tracking event you added impacted the
shipment stop times.
Viewing Updated Arrival and Departure Times

19. Log back in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. For example, COREDEMO.ADMIN.

24. Click the ID of the shipment with the highest sequential number.
OTM displays the Identification tab.
25. Click the Stops tab. s a
OTM displays the Stops tab. ) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
26. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop for Salem where the delayed
event occurred.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
OTM displays the Shipment Stops page.
u
him Stud
27. Compare the Planned Arrival Time, Estimated Arrival Time, and Actual Arrival Time
fields.
n t
lika this
 Planned times always remain as originally calculated.
u
ikฺh use
 The actual arrival time is the time you entered on the shipment tracking event.
th
k ar se to
 OTM updates downstream estimated times based on the actual arrival time but does
(
u tt cen
not change upstream estimated times. In this example, the estimated departure time
hi ble li
m
on stop 2 and the estimated arrival/departure times on stop 3 are updated.
n t
lika sfera
u
H Editr(the
OTM returns to the Stops tab.
th
29. ikClick - t anpencil icon) next to the third stop for Tillamook.
r nondisplays the Shipment Stops page.
Ka OTM
30. Compare the Planned Arrival Time, Estimated Arrival Time, Planned Departure Time, and
Estimated Departure Time.
Note the planned times have not changed but the estimated times have been
updated based on the shipment tracking event entered on the previous stop.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times
Chapter 1 - Page 91
Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events
In this practice, you will act as Northwest Truck Lines and add a shipment tracking event
of shipment delayed to the multi-stop TL shipment.
Entering a Shipment Tracking Event

1. Ensure only one OTM window is open.
2. Log out of OTM if necessary.
3. Login to OTM as SERVPROV.SHAREDCORE-NW99 using password CHANGEME.

4. Click Buy Shipment Events.
5. Enter a Shipment Reference Number of YOURDOMAIN. For example, CORE102.
6. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of GLOG.
OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page containing all buy shipments with a
s a
service provider of NW99.
8. Click the ID. ) h a
om
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page.
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
9. Click Add Shipment Tracking Event at the bottom of the page.
o
tt@ ent G
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Event page.
u
nthim Stud
10. Select a Responsible Party of Carrier.
ika this
11. Select a Status of Delayed and Shipment Delayed.
ul
kฺh use
12. Select a Reason of Driver Related and Driver Related.
thi
ar se to
13. Select a Shipment Stop of 2. SALEM, OR, USA.
(k
tt cen
14. Enter an Event Date/Time of Today’s Date at 23:30
u
hi ble li
(11:30PM).
t m
n
u lika sfera
OTM displays the Results page.
ik H ran
16. In the navigation trail at the top of the
a rth non-t
page, click the Buy Shipments
K Result link.
17. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking
Events page.
Note your newly added event in the
Shipment Tracking Event History
section. Saved Query Name Number of Matchings
18. Log out of the SERVPROV domain.
19. Log back in to OTM as
21. Close the Business Monitor page.
YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. For example
CORE102.ADMIN.
20. Click Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Which query has been updated
after performing this exercise?
Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Chapter 1 - Page 92
Solution – Entering Shipment Tracking Events
Entering a Shipment Tracking Event
Once you enter the shipment tracking event and check your business monitor, the following
saved query is updated.
Saved Query Name Number of Matchings
SHIPMENT-DELAYED 1
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Chapter 1 - Page 93
Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment
In this practice, you will act as a transport planner for BestFoods Corporation in Portland
and find out how this delay affects your shipment.
Viewing the Updated Arrival and Departure Times


3. Click the ID.
4. Click the Stops tab.
OTM displays the Stops tab.
5. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop for Salem where the delayed
s a
event was entered.
OTM displays the Shipment Stops page. ) h a
o m
l ecฺ eฺ
6. Compare the planned times, estimated times, and actual times for stop 2 (Salem).
c
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time
ora Arrival
Actual
u id Time
tt@ ent G
u
Planned Departure
n thim Stud Actual Departure
Estimated Departure
l a hi s
ikTime
Time
u t Time
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
u ttof thecpage.
e n
OTM returns ntoth
im
7. Click Save at the bottom
e
the Stopsltab.
li
a a b
u
8. Click Edit fer icon) next to the third stop for Tillamook.
lik(the spencil
i H anthe Shipment Stops page.
kOTM displays
r
th - t
n the planned times, estimated times, and actual times for stop 3 (Tillamook). Note
r9. Compare
Ka how nothe estimated times have been updated based on the event entered for stop 2 –
Salem.
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time Actual Arrival Time
Planned Departure Estimated Departure Actual Departure

Time Time Time
Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment

Chapter 1 - Page 94
Solution – Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment
Viewing the Updated Arrival and Departure Times
Your stop times are updated for stop 2 (Salem) as follows:
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time Actual Arrival Time
Same Same Date/time of shipment
event
Planned Departure Estimated Departure Actual Departure
Time Time Time
Same Date/time of actual arrival Empty
time on stop 2 plus 30
minutes activity time
s a
) h a
Your stop times are updated for stop 3 (Tillamook) as follows:
cฺo m
c leArrival ฺ
eTime
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time
o ra
Actual
u id
Date/time of estimated tt@Empty t G
Same
m u2 de n
departure time on stop
h i
tof 1 hourStu
a n
plus transit time
is
40 minutes
u lik th
i ฺh usDeparture
kEstimated e
Planned Departure
rt
a seh t o
Actual Departure
Time
(k
tt ceDate/time
n
Time Time
Same
im u li of estimated Empty
a nth ble arrival time on stop 3 plus
ik ra 30 minutes activity time
H ul nsfe
r th ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution – Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment

Chapter 1 - Page 95
Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 96
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information
Track and Trace Shipments
Track and trace displays order or shipment information. In this example, you are going to view
shipment information.
1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Shipment Visibility.

OTM displays the Shipment Visibility page.
5. Right-click on the Shipment ID and select
Track and Trace from the SmartLinks
menu.
Note the shipment Trace and Trace page displays information such as source and s a
)
destination locations, service provider, planned and actual dates, equipment, and shipment h a
event history.
o m
6. Scroll down to the Reference Numbers section.
c lecฺ eฺ
7.
Note the reference number with a qualifier of BM for this shipment. o ra uid
Reference Number = BM
u tt@ ent G
n t him Stud
ika tabout is their shipments in transit.
Public Tracking
Public tracking enables your customers to getu l h
kฺhdata orusshipment
e ID. In this example, you
information
Customers can search by reference number
th i
will search for shipments using ak
( ar reference
specific
s e to number.
8. Click Shipment Management u tt >ceVisibility
n > Public Tracking.
t m
hi Reference li
e Number Qualifier of BM.
9. Select a Shipment
n
a erReference
a b l
10. Enter the
u likShipment
s f Number you copied above.
ik H Search
11. Click
ra nat the bottom of the page.
rth OTM t
- the Public Tracking page.
ndisplays
K a  noThe Public Tracking page displays scheduled arrival and departure information,
reference numbers, and freight details.
 Note in the Freight Movement section, you can see this shipment is delayed.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information

Chapter 1 - Page 97
Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments
In this practice, you will track and trace your shipment and view shipment tracking
event information for your multi-stop TL shipment.
Tracking and Tracing a Shipment

1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Shipment Visibility.
2. Click Search.
OTM displays the Shipment Visibility results page.

3. On the shipment you just created, right-click and select Track and Trace from the
SmartLinks menu.
4. Note the reference number with a qualifier of BM (i.e. bill of lading number) for
this shipment.
s a
Reference Number = BM
) h a
om
Viewing the Shipment Event
c lecฺ eฺ
5. In the breadcrumb trail, click the Shipment Visibility Result
ora uid
link.
u t t@ nt G
thim tude
7. Click Actions > Events > View Shipment Tracking
l ik an his S
Events.
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events
ik ฺhu use t
page.
8. Enter the shipment event
Field
a rth to Enter This Value…
information below.
Event Descriptiontt (
k n se
im u li c e
a n th ble
Event Location
uEvent
s era
lik Date/Time
f
9. ik
H an Tracking Events page.
Close thetrShipment
a rth non-
K
Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 98
Solution – Tracking and Tracing Shipments
Track and Trace a Shipment
The bill of lading, or BM, reference number is as follows:
Reference Number = BM NW99-000001 (It can vary if many shipments
were built before.)
Viewing the Shipment Event

Your shipment tracking event information is as follows:
Field Enter This Value…
Event Description SHIPMENT DELAYED
s a
Event Location 2. SHAREDCORE.SALEM, OR, USA
) h a
Event Date/Time Today’s date and a time of 23:30
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
n t him Stud
u lika this
th ikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Tracking and Tracing Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 99
Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information
Viewing Public Tracking Information
You will search for shipments using a specific reference number.
1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Public Tracking.
2. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of BM.
3. Enter the Shipment Reference Number Value you noted in the previous practice. Note:
this is the reference number value with a reference number qualifier of BM.
OTM displays the Public Tracking results page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information

Chapter 1 - Page 100
Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information
Viewing Public Tracking Information
You can see tracking information about your shipment.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information

Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender
a Multi-stop Shipment
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment
Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations
Creating a Location
When creating a location, you should enter as much information as possible. This enables
OTM to better plan your orders into shipments.
2. Enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC.

OTM displays the Locations results page.
4. Click the ID.
 Note the Location ID is grayed out when editing. Once a business object is created
in OTM, the ID cannot be changed. The only way to change an ID is to copy the
object, enter the new ID, and delete the old object. For each domain, the ID must be
unique. Your company may create a naming scheme to control IDs.
s a
 Note the Location Name. The name makes it easier to find an object if the ID is
) h a
cryptic.
o m
 c
Note the Corporation ID. Each location must be assigned to a corporation. lecฺ eฺ
o a and
rlatitude u id
 Note the address information. OTM can populate the values for
tt@ epostaln G
t code, and
u
longitude based on known combinations of city, state/province,
im tud
country.
nth S

i
It is possible to have OTM verify part of your
l k a address
h i sinformation against data you
u t
kanฺhunknownsecombination.
know is correct. For example, OTM can prevent you from saving a location if the
th
postal code, city, and country are i u
(k ar se to
Location roles areuusedtt to cidentify
e n the function of a location.

t m
hi allowsblyouli
e to enter multiple location roles for a location. Data on this tab
 The Roles
a n tab
a
may
u lik sfer to calculate distance values and rates.
be used by OTM
ik H Editr(the
6. Click
a npencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role.
rth Depending t
na-location
K a n o
select
on the location role selected, different fields may appear on this page. If you
role of XDOCK, you will see this page looks different than for a location
role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
7. Click the Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 1H.
On the Activity Time Definition page, you can set a fixed stop time and variable stop time.
If you have specified both a fixed and variable stop time, OTM adds them together.
 Fixed stop time identifies a set period of time. In this example, the Fixed Stop Time is
1 H (hours).
 Variable stop time is in terms of time per weight, volume, ship units, etc.
8. Close the Activity Time Definition page.
10. Click the Routing tab.
 Note the Location Classification. Some rates may differ between residential and
commercial locations.
 Note the Service Provider Profile. You can exclude certain carriers from being used for
a location or enforce the use of certain carriers for this location. For example, a
location has asked that a specific carrier is always used for their location.

 Note the Equipment Group Profile. You can define use, or non-use, of certain types of
equipment for this location. For example, a particular loading dock may not be able to
handle 53ft equipment.
 Note the Substitute Location ID. You can define another location where shipments
should be picked up or delivered instead of at this location. For example, for the
next few weeks, you want to use an alternate location instead of picking up at the
usual location.
 Note the Operational Locations section. When transporting goods to/from ports,
airports, or rail ramps, there can be different points within them that goods are
delivered to or picked up from. You can have multiple operational locations associated
with a location.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Creating Locations
In addition to creating a source location, you are also going to create the corporation to
which the location is assigned.
Creating a Source Location

2. Click New.

4. Enter a Location Name of PHOENIX DC.
5. Click n (new) next to Corporation ID.
OTM displays the Corporation manager.
6. Enter a Corporation ID of PHOENIX
s a
CORP.
) h a
7. Enter a Corporation Name of
om
PHOENIX CORPORATION.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
OTM returns to the Identification tab.
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
9. Enter an Address Line of 123 MAIN
STREET.
nt
10. Enter a City of PHOENIX.
ulika this
hikฺh use
11. Enter a Province Code of AZ.
t
(kar se to
12. Enter a Postal Code of 85004.
u tt cen
thi ble li
m
n
lika sfera
u
k H ran
i
a rth non-t
OTM displays the Role page.
K 16. Select a Location Role of
SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
17. Enter an Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 1H (already
created). This activity time definition specifies a fixed stop time of 1 hour.
18. Click Save to the far right of the Activity Time Definition ID field.
20. Click Finished at the top of the
page.
Create a Destination Location

21. Click Create Another. (Shipment Management > Location Manager)
22. Enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE.
23. Enter a Corporation ID of GENERAL STORE INC (already
created). Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
24. Enter
Practice an Address
1 - Creating Line of 2100 WILSHIRE BLVD.
Locations
25. Enter a City of LOS ANGELES. Chapter 1 - Page 106
26. Enter a Province Code of CA.
31. Select a Location Role of
SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
32. Enter an Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 30M (already
created). This activity time definition specifies a fixed stop time of 30 minutes.
33. Click Save to the far right of the Activity Time Definition ID field.
s a
page.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
Verifying a Destination Location
ra SanuiDiego
Searchofor the G
d
tt@ ent
The location forQuestion
the San Diego Store has been created
Enterfor you.
Your Answers…
Store and verify the following data: u
What is the stop time for
n thim Stud
SAN DIEGO STORE?
u lika this
Who is the contact listed
th ikฺh use
for this store?
( k ar se to
utt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Locations

Solution – Creating Locations
Creating a Source Location
You successfully created a location with an ID of PHOENIX DC.
Creating a Destination Location

You successfully created a location with an ID of LOS ANGELES STORE.
Verifying a Destination Location

The data for the San Diego Store is as follows:
Question Enter Your Answers…
What is the stop time for 30 M (Click the + next to SHIP FROM/SHIP TO)
SAN DIEGO STORE?
Miranda Michaels s a
Who is the contact listed
for this store? ) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Locations

Lesson 17: Creating Calendars
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 17: Creating Calendars

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars
Creating a Calendar

4. Click the ID.
6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role.
s a
7. Click v (view) next to Calendar ID.
h a
) For
Cyclical calendars represent activities that occur in a cycle such as daily or m

o
eฺc eฺ
weekly.
a cyclical calendar, you must specify:
c l
 Start Date – For example, if you want your weekly cycle to start
o ra on Mondays,
u id
select a date that is a Monday.
tt@ ent G
i u
m tudand 7 for a weekly
 Days in Cycle – Common values are 1 for a daily
th
n is S
calendar
calendar.
lik a
 Annual calendars cover a period of
h
ฺ u
time that thnot repeat. For annual calendars,
does
e
you must specify that you wouldik us to be an annual calendar with non-
r
a set h like this calendar
to
(knote
cyclical activities.

u tt
In the Activities section,
e n Times and Activity. Since your Days in Cycle is 1, the
the
detail will applym
hiis performed
to every l i
day c in your calendar. In this example, the calendar tells OTM
n t b le
ik a
that receiving
r a at this location between 6AM and 9PM every day.
H ul thisncargo
Since
s fe is attached to a location, OTM determines that the location only
calendar
th ik activitytr
receives
- afor the remaining
during the time window explicitly specified here. You could add an
a r noisnnot required. hours of the day telling OTM to not perform receiving but it
K
 Note the Override Name of CHRISTMAS. In this example, OTM prevents receiving
activities during Christmas Day regardless of what is defined in the Activities section
above.
 Note the Activity Time Factor in both the Activities and Override grids. An activity
time factor is used to alter the amount of time an appointment will take to finish at a
given location. The activity time on the shipment stop is multiplied by the value you
enter in the Activity Time Factor field. The resulting value is used determine the
appointment slots used for making an appointment.
8. Close the Calendar page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars

Practice 1 - Creating Calendars
In this practice, you are going to add a calendar to your Los Angeles Store location.
Creating a Calendar

4. Click the ID.
6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role you
s a
previously created.
) h a
om
7. Click n (new) next to Calendar ID.
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM displays the Calendar manager.
ora uid
8. Enter a Calendar ID of 6AM TO
u tt@ ent G
9PM.
nthim Stud
ika this
9. Enter Calendar Notes of 6AM TO
9PM 7 DAYS. ul
thikฺh use
10. Select the option button next to I
(kar se to
would like this calendar’s cycle to
u
be 7 days long. tt cen
thi ble li
m
11. Enter 1 into the days long text field.
n
lika sfera
12. Select a morning of date of the
u
ik H ran
previous Monday.
a rth non-t
13. Click Next at the bottom of the page.
K OTM displays the Calendar detail page.
14. Enter a Day of 1.
Since your cycle is 1, the detail will
apply to every day in your calendar.
15. Select a Start Time of 6AM and :00
minutes.
16. Select an End Time of 9PM and :00
minutes.
17. Select an Activity of RECEIVE.
18. Mark the option button next to
Perform.
19. Click Save to the right of the Activity
Time Factor field.
20. Click Activity Calendar Overrides at the bottom of the
page. OTM displays the Activity Calendar Overrides page.
21. Enter an Override Name of CHRISTMAS.
22. Click the Calendar icon next ©to2014,
Copyright Start Date
Oracle and/orand select
its affiliates. the reserved.
All rights
upcoming December
25.
23. Select the Activity of RECEIVE. Chapter 1 - Page 111
24. Mark the option button next to Don’t Perform.
25. Click Save to the right of the Activity Time Factor field.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Creating Calendars
Creating a Calendar
You successfully created a calendar with an ID of 6AM to 9PM on your LOS ANGELES STORE
location.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Calendars

Lesson 18: Creating Contacts
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 18: Creating Contacts

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts
Creating a Contact
1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contacts.
2. Enter a Contact ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER.
OTM displays the Contacts results page.

4. Click the ID.
 The Contact Manager is used to create a contact and provide specific details that
relate to the contact. Some of the information specified on the Contact Manager
is reflected on related documents such as invoices and bills.
 Note the Language Spoken. OTM selects a tender notification template matching
the language you specify.
 Note the User ID. If you want the contact to use Message Center to review s a
messages, you must specify the user ID for the contact.
) h a
o m
eฺc eฺ
 Note the Location. When you create a contact through a location or service provider,
c l
ra to uid
OTM automatically populates the location field.
o
tt@ ent G
 Note the Notification On check box. This check box must be marked
enable notification. u
5. Click the Notification tab.
n thim Stud
 Note the Com Method ID. This indicatesik
l a preferred
the
h iscommunication method for
u
this contact. Options include EMAILฺhand MESSAGE t
e mayCENTER.
h ik
t specify u s Depending on the
communication method selected,
a r to
different fields
k nonsethe Contact tab.
need to be populated on the
Contact tab. For example,
tt (Address
if you a communication method ID of EMAIL, you
im u lice
must specify an Email
 t
Note the Rank
n h 1.bThis
of le field prioritizes the communication methods you specify.
li a Calendar
kthe e raID. If you leave the calendar undefined, OTM assumes your
 Note
u sf
Hcontactraisnavailable 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
ik -tthat there is a second communication method ID of MANUAL with a rank of
a rth  noNote
n
K 2. You can enter as many communication methods as you need.
 Note: OTM selects the highest-ranked communication method supported by both the
service provider and planner at the time of notification.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts

Practice 1 - Creating Contacts
You are going to add a new contact to an existing location. Instead of creating the contact and
then assigning it to the location, you will edit the location and then create a new contact for
that location.
Creating a Contact
2. On the Location search tab, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX.

4. Click the ID.
5. Click the Communication and Remarks tab.
OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab.
s a
6.
a
Within the Additional Contacts section, click n (new) next to Contact
) h
ID. OTM displays the Contact Manager.
om
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Enter a First Name of MARK.
ora uid
9. Enter a Last Name of JONES.
u tt@ ent G
10.
him Stud
Select a Language Spoken of English.
nt
ika this
11. Click f (find) next to User ID.
ul
kฺh use
OTM displays the User search page.
thi
ar se to
12. Enter a Domain Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE102).
13. (k
tt cen
Click Search at the bottom of the page.
u
hi ble li
m
OTM displays the Users results page.
14. nt
Mark the option button next to
u lika sfera
YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN.
15. k H an
r th i n- r
Click Finish at the top of the page.
t
Ka 16. no
OTM returns to the Contact tab.
Ensure that the Notification On
check box is selected. It should be
selected by default.
17. Click Contact Notification at the bottom of the
page. OTM displays the Notification tab.
18. Select a Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER.
19. Enter a Rank of 1.
20. Click Save to the right of the Calendar ID field.
21. Select a second Communication Method of
MANUAL.
23. Click Save to the right of the Calendar ID field.
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab and applies your contact to the
Phoenix DC.
25. Click Save to the far right of the Contact ID field.
Practice 1 - Creating Contacts
Solution – Creating Contacts
Creating a Contact
You successfully created a contact with an ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER. This contact is
associated with your PHOENIX DC location.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Contacts

Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities
Commodities are used in the shipment planning process and allow you to control things like
mode compatibility, equipment compatibility (including temperature range compatibility) as well
as commodity to commodity compatibility.
Creating a Commodity
1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Commodity.
2. Click New at the bottom of the page.

OTM displays the Commodity manager.
3. Enter a Commodity ID of SHELL
FISH.
4. Select the Temperature Control check
box.
When you select this check box, OTM only selects equipment that supports
s a
the temperature range you specify in the Temperature Control ID field.
) h a
5. Enter a Temperature Control ID of REFRIGERATED.
o m
You can define the minimum and maximum temperature this commodity must c lecฺ eฺ
stay within. o ra uid
6. Select a Mode Profile of AIR.
u tt@ ent G
thim Stud
Your commodity might require a specific transport mode to be used. For example, you want
n
to ensure your shell fish is transported via air.
u l ika this
Also note the following fields:
th ikฺh you tousspecify
e
 Equipment Group Profile ID
(k ar with
allows
s e tocommodity. equipment groups that
u tt cenallows
are compatible or incompatible this

th im le lyou
Commodity Incompatibilitiesi are currently
you to specify commodities that OTM should not
a n
plan with the
b
commodity
a
creating. For example, do not plan
ik sfer
ulnecessary
chemicals and food into one shipment.
It isHnot n to save the page.
ik tra
a rth non-
K
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities

Practice 1 - Creating Commodities
Create two commodities: one for snack food and a second for automotive parts.
1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Commodity.
OTM displays the Commodity manager.

3. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK
FOOD.
5. s
Click Create Another. (Order Management > Material Management > a
Commodity) OTM displays the Commodity manager. ) h a
om
6. Enter a Commodity ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS.
c lecฺ eฺ
7.
ra uid
Enter a Commodity Incompatibilities of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise).
o
tt@ ent G
8. Click Save to the right of the Commodity Incompatibilities field.
u
him Stud
n
OTM displays the confirmation page.t
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Commodities

Solution – Creating Commodities
You successfully created a commodity with an ID of SNACK FOOD.
You successfully created a commodity with an ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS and indicated it is
incompatible with the SNACK FOOD commodity.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Commodities

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items
Viewing an Item
1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Item.
3. Click the Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.
4. Note the Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD.

This is where you link your item with a commodity
5. Note the effective and expiration dates. You can prevent OTM from building shipments
containing items outside their effective time window.
6. Note the classification standards fields such as NMFC Article ID, STCC ID, and HTS
ID. You can specify different industry classifications for an item. If you cannot find the
classification system you need, you can define your own using the User Defined
Commodity ID and User Defined Commodity List ID fields.
s a
 Note the NMFC (National Motor Freight Classification) classification which includes
) h a
o
class 50 to class 500 and is used for Less-than-Truckload or LTL rating. The NMFC m
lecฺ eฺ
provides both carriers and shippers with a standard by which to begin pricing
c
ra uid
negotiations and greatly simplifies the comparative evaluation of the many thousands
o
tt@ ent G
of products moving in today's marketplace. The higher the expense or the risk of
u
hauling the commodity, the higher the class designation. Therefore, the higher the
thim Stud
class, the higher the corresponding per hundredweight rate.
n

li a hisCode) codes which are mostly
kCommodity
et
Note the STCC (Standard Transportation
k
used for rail are important to have for u
ฺh ratinguspurposes.
Note the HTS (Harmonized rTariff
i
th System)

classification developed(k a e to codes which are an international commodity
u tt goods
under the
e n s classified by what
auspices of the Customs Cooperation Council. In
their stagetof im
the Harmonized System,
h ble
fabrication, li c
their
are
use, or origin. The
they are, and not according to
Harmonized System nomenclature is
n
a era
ulikthenSITC
logically structured by economic activity or component material.
 HNote sf (Standard International Trade Classification) codes which are a
r th n - tra numerical code system developed by the United Nations to classify
ik standard
Ka nocommodities used in international trade. OTM provides a list of SITC codes that
you can use or you can add your own.
Viewing the Auto-generated Packaged Item

By default, when you create a new item, OTM will create a new packaged item with the exact
same ID as the item. So in this example, when the item CHOCOLATE COOKIES was created,
a new packaged item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES was also created by OTM.
7. Click the Packaged Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.
OTM displays the Packaged Item page.
8. Note the Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX.
In this example, there is a packaging unit of LARGE BOX. This is the package in
which smaller boxes are being shipped.
9. Note the Package Weight of 25 LB.
Note the Package Weight. Since there is a packaging unit specified OTM interprets the
package weight as the weight of 10 small boxes and the tare weight of the packaging
unit.
10. Note the Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX.

11. Scroll down and note the Inner Pack Count of 10.
Note the Inner Pack Count. This is the number of packaged items in each packaging unit.
In this example, you are shipping 10 small boxes of the item in a large box
12. Close the Packaged Item page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 2 - Creating Items
Creating an Item
OTM displays the Header tab.
3. Enter an Item ID of CHOCOLATE

COOKIES.
FOOD (from previous exercise).
page.
OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES
with an identical ID.
s a
) h a
Editing the Packaged Item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES
om
Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information.
c lecฺ eฺ
6. Click Order Management > Material Management > Packaged o ra uid
Item.
7. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CHOC.
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
9. Click the CHOCOLATE COOKIES link.
ulika this
OTM displays the Packaged Item page.ฺh
th ik u se
10. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE
( k ar se to
BOX.
uttof 25cLB.
e n
m
i Packaging
11. Enter a Package Weight
hPack li
a
12. Select an Inner nt
a b le Unit
u
of SMALLlik BOX.sfer
13. ik H r n enter an Inner Pack
aand
th
r non - t
Scroll down
Ka 14. Click
Count of 10.
Finished at the top of the page.
Creating an Item
15. Click Order Management > Material
Management > Item.
17. Enter an Item ID of CRACKERS.
FOOD (from previous exercise).
page.
OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of CRACKERS with
an identical ID.
Editing the Packaged Item CRACKERS

Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information.
20. Click Order Management > Material Management > Packaged Item.
21. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CRACKER.
25. Enter a Package Weight of 20 LB.
26. Select an Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX.
27. Scroll down and enter an Inner Pack Count of 10.
Creating an Item
29. Click Order Management > Material

Management > Item.
31. Enter an Item ID of MOTOR OIL.
32. Enter a Commodity ID of
AUTOMOTIVE PARTS (from
s a
previous exercise).
) h a
33. Enter a NMFC Class ID of 60.0 om
(already created).
c lecฺ eฺ
34. Click Finished at the top of the ora uid
page.
u tt@ ent G
thim Stud
OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of MOTOR OIL with
n
ika this
an identical ID.
u l
Editing the Packaged Item MOTOR OILikฺh se
th u
k
Next, you edit the new packaged item
( ar to add
s e to
packaging information.
35. Click Order Management u tt > Material
c e n Management > Packaged Item.
36. Enter a Packagedt m li
hi ItembIDleof MOTOR.
n
lika atsthe
37. Click Search
u fe ra of the page.
bottom
ik H the MOTOR
38. Click
ra n OIL link.
rth OTM t
- the Packaged Item page.
ndisplays
a n o
K 39. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX.
40. Select an Inner Pack Packaging Unit of CAN.
41. Scroll down and enter an Inner Pack Count of 6.

Solution – Creating Items
Creating an Item
You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.
You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of CRACKERS.
You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of MOTOR OIL.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Items

Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group
Profiles
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 20: Creating Equipment

Groups and Equipment Group
Profiles
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups
Creating an Equipment Group
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group.
2. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER.
OTM displays the Equipment Groups results page.

4. Click the ID.
5. In the top part of the page, note the following
 Note the Effective Volume, Effective Weight, Length, Width, and Height fields. OTM
plans shipments using only equipment that can handle the volume, weight, and
dimensions of your goods. These dimensions are used in planning and optimization
calculations.
6. Scroll down until you see the Capacity in Reference Units section.
s a
 You can specify Equipment Reference Units (ERUs) to define specific capacity limits. ) h a
o m
ecฺ eฺ
You can define an equipment reference unit for transport handling units so regardless
c l
of how OTM optimizes, whether for weight, volume, or both, the equipment reference
unit serves as a constraint to avoid overloading the equipment.
o ra uid
 You can select multiple ERUs. Since you can have multiple
u t Gon an order, you
tt@shipeunits
n
can have multiple ERUs.
n thim Stud
7. Scroll back up to the top of the page:
u l ka tthe
imatches h istemperature constraints on your
 Note the Temperature Control ID. OTM
commodities with the temperature
th ikฺhrange supported
u se by the equipment group. OTM
combines commodities with
(k arequipment
s e towithin the same temperature range.
u tt CurvecID
e nfields are only considered when using the load
 The Door Height and
m l
hifunctionality. i
a n t
configuration
a b le note Equipment Types section:
ulik nsTypes fer are used to define the characteristics of an equipment group. Using
8. In the bottom half of the page,
 HEquipment
r th n - tra Trailers as an example of an equipment group profile, the group in that
ik Intermodal
Ka noprofile could be 45' or 48' trailers. The equipment type against that group would be
either a rollup or swing door trailer.
 Equipment types are used to determine capacity information for a service provider.
Capacity information can be critical in the shipment planning process.
 An equipment type is not required.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups

Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment
Group.
OTM displays the Equipment Group page.
3. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT

TRAILER.
4. Enter an Effective Volume of 3576 CU
FT.
5. Enter an Effective Weight of 48000 LB.
6. Enter a Length of 47.5 FT.
7. Enter a Width of 8.25 FT. s a
8. Enter a Height of 9.25 FT. ) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
Verifying Equipment Group u tt@ ent G
Question
10. Click Modify Another.
n thim Stud
Enter Your Answers…
11. SearchWhat is Equipment
the effective Group ID
lik a hi s
for an
h
ฺ u e t
weight
of 53FT of the Equipment
TRAILER.
ik
th to u s
Group 53FT TRAILER?
a r
u
(Hint: Go to Shipmenttt (k cense
Management
t im> le li
hManagement
n
a eGroup.)
Equipment
k r ab
>liEquipment f
ik Hu rans
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups

Solution – Creating Equipment Groups
You successfully created an equipment group with an ID of 48FT TRAILER.
Verifying Equipment Group

You successfully verified the following equipment:

What is the effective weight 49000.00 LB
of the Equipment Group
53FT TRAILER?
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Equipment Groups

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles
Creating an Equipment Group Profile
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile.
2. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.
OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile results page.

4. Click the ID.
 Note the Compatible check box. This is used to include or exclude equipment groups
in the profile when computing results.
 If you mark the Compatible check box, OTM must use one of the equipment
groups listed in the equipment group profile.
 If you leave the Compatible check box cleared, OTM cannot use any of
s a
the equipment groups listed in the equipment group profile.
) h a
 When you assign the equipment group profile to other objects in OTM such as
om
ecฺ eฺ
commodity, rates, itinerary, location, or order, OTM determines if it is compatible or
c l
incompatible with the object to which it is assigned using the Compatible check
box. o ra uid
 Note the Equipment Group ID. You can enter as manyuequipment t G as you need.
tt@ engroups
n thim Stud
u lika this
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles

Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile.
OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile page.
3. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.

4. Mark the Compatible check box.
5. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER (from previous exercise).
6. Click Save to the right of the Equipment Group ID field.
s a
) h a
8. Click Create Another. (Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment
om
ecฺ eฺ
Group Profile)
c l
OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile page.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
9. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT.
u
him Stud
10. Ensure the Compatible check box is not marked.
nt
11. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 53FT TRAILER (from previous exercise).
ulika this
th ikฺh use
13. Enter a second Equipment Group ID of 53FT DOMESTIC CONTAINER (already
exists).
( k ar se to
u tt cen
thi ble li
m
15. Enter a third Equipment Group ID of 53FT DRY VAN (already exists).
n
lika sfera
u
ik H Finished
17. Click
ra n at the top of the page.
rth OTM t
- the confirmation page.
ndisplays
K a n o
Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles

Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles
You successfully created an equipment group profile with an ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.
You successfully created an equipment group profile with an ID of 53FT TRAILERS
INCOMPAT.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles

Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles
Assigning an Equipment Group Profile to a Location

4. Click the ID.
5. Click the Routing tab.
OTM displays the Routing tab.
6. Enter an Equipment Group Profile of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT (from previous
exercise).
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles

Solution – Assigning Equipment Group Profiles
Assigning an Equipment Group Profile to a Location
You successfully assigned the equipment group profile of 53FT INCOMPAT to your LOS
ANGELES STORE location.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Assigning Equipment Group Profiles

Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers
Creating a Service Provider
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager.
OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab.
3. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of

DEMOSP.
Note the service provider information
looks similar to locations.
4. Enter a Corporation ID of BIG TEXAN
TRUCKING (from previous exercise).
 Note the SCAC field. You can specify the SCAC assigned to a service provider. A
Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC) identifies transportation companies.
s a
 Note the Mode Profile. The mode profile is a grouping of transport modes.
) h a
o m
Each service provider can be associated to one mode profile containing one to
many transport modes.
c lecฺ eฺ
 o ra way ofuiidentifying
Note the Service Provider Alias section. This provides an alternate d
tt@ ent G
service providers.
u
n thim Stud
u lika as taddress,
You can specify location specific information such
h is city, state/province, and
kฺh use
country.
th i
ar se to
OTM automatically creates(a: k
tt cen
Correspondingm u li
hi SERVPROV
 location
n t le

l ik a erab
User ID in the
H u nsf
domain
r th
Adding - tra Provider Contact
ik a nService
Ka Whennyouo click Finished and OTM creates a user ID for this service provider, you can then
enter contact information for the service provider.
7. Click Edit on the confirmation page.
9. Select a Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER.
10. Click f (find) next to User ID.
OTM displays the User search tab.
11. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, COREDEMO).
13. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-DEMOSP.
This is the default naming convention OTM uses to create a user ID for service
providers.
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab.
OTM automatically creates a primary contact for your service provider.
Adding Service Provider

Guided Demonstration Contact
1 - Creating Details
Service Providers
When you click Finished and OTM creates Chapter 1 - Pagecontact
a primary 137 for you service provider, you can
then enter detailed information for the contact associated with the service provider.
OTM only displays the details button after it has created a primary contact for you.
18. Click Details on the right side of the page near the top.
OTM displays the Contact manager page in view
mode.
19. Click Edit at the top of the page.

OTM displays the Contact tab.
21. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Com
Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER.
22. Ensure the Rank of 1 is entered.
23. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours).
s a
The response time indicates the time period in which you expect the service provider
) h a
to respond to a tender.
o m
24. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO 11PM.
c lecฺ eฺ
25. Click v (view) next to Calendar ID.
o ra uid
OTM displays the Calendar view page.
u tt@ ent G

n th m StuOTM
OTM uses primary contacts for tendering. During itendering, d looks for
ikathis istahweekly
is calendar.
the calendar activity of OFFICEHOURS.
u l
kฺh se
 Note the Days in Cycle of 7. This indicates
Days 1 through 5 specify thatth ani activity ofuOFFICEHOURS

4:00AM to 11:00PM. (ka
r e to is performed from
u tt that an
c e ns of OFFICEHOURS is not available (i.e. Don’t

thimwould
Days 6 and 7 specify
Perform). OTM l e li implicitly interpreted the calendar this way without
have
activity
k n abfor days 6 and 7.

a thisedetail
r
li
indicating
f
26. Close
ik Huthe rCalendar
a n s view page.
a r27. -t to the Notification tab.
th OTMonreturns
K n Save to the right of the
Click
Calendar ID field.
page.
Service Provider ID page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers

Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers
To create a service provider, you first need to enter the basic data for the service provider.
Creating a Truckload Service Provider


3. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of
BTT9.
4. Enter a Service Provider/Location
Name of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING.
6. Enter a Corporation ID of BIG TEXAN
TRUCKING. s a
7. Click Finished at the top of the page. ) h a
om
OTM returns to the Service Provider ID
c lecฺ eฺ
tab.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
8. Select a Mode Profile of TL.
u
him Stud
nt
10. Select a Time Zone of America/Phoenix.
ulika this
hikฺh use
t
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers

Solution – Creating Service Providers
You successfully created a service provider with an ID of BTT9.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Service Providers

Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts
When you click Finished and OTM creates a User ID for this service provider, you can then
enter contact information for the service provider.
Adding a Service Provider Contact


3. Select the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER.
4. Click on f (find) next to User ID.
OTM displays the Users Finder page.
5. Enter a User Name of
s a
YOURDOMAIN (for example,
CORE101). ) h a
om
6. Click Search at the bottom of the
c lecฺ eฺ
page.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-BTT9. u
n thim Stud
OTM creates a user account in the SERVPROV domain for you every time you create
a service provider in any domain.
ulika this
th ikฺh use
kar nseProvider
to
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab.
9. Click Finished at the topttof(the Service
u c e ID page.
n th m ble li page.
OTM displays the iconfirmation
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts

Solution – Adding Service Provider Contacts
You successfully added a service provider contact to your BTT9 service provider.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Adding Service Provider Contacts

Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details
When you clicked Finished and OTM created a primary contact for your service provider,
you can then enter detailed information for this contact associated with the service provider.
You are also going to add a second service provider, including contact details, for ANTELOPE
LINE.
Adding the Service Provider Contact Details


OTM displays the Contact Manager page in view
s a
mode.
) h a
om
OTM displays the Contact tab.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
OTM displays the Notification
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
tab.
nt
ika this
6. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the
right of the Com Method ID of
ul
MESSAGE CENTER.
thikฺh use
7. Enter a Response Time of 2 H
(k ar se to
(hours).
8. Enter a Calendar iID m utt licen
a n th ble of 4AM TO
lik nextstofetheraCalendar
11PM.
9. Click u Save
ikID H
field. ran
a th
r10. Select
o n -t
K n
MANUAL.
a Com Method ID of

12. Enter a Response Time of 2 H
(hours).
13. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO
11PM.
14. Click Save next to the Calendar
ID field.
page.
OTM displays the
Communication and Remarks
tab.
17. Click Finished.
Note: You may see an error message about saving or canceling you changes since
changes have been made while
Copyright youOracle
© 2014, were editing
and/or your
its affiliates. contact.
All rights reserved.This is normal.
18. Click
Practice the plus
3 - Adding signProvider
Service next toContact
ShowDetails
Changes.
19. Click Save Your Changes at the bottom Chapterof1 -the
Page 143
message.
OTM displays the Corporation manager.
25. Enter a Corporation ID of ANTELOPE
LINE INC.
OTM returns to the Service Provider ID
tab.
27. Select a Mode Profile of TL.

29. Select a Time Zone of
America/Phoenix.
s a
) h a
31. Click Edit on the confirmation page. om
OTM displays the Service Provider c lecฺ eฺ
ID tab. ora uid
32. Click the Communication and u tt@ ent G
Remarks tab.
nthim Stud
OTM displays the Communication
ulika this
and Remarks tab.
thikฺh use
ar se to
33. Select the Communication Method
of MESSAGE CENTER. (k
tt cen
u
hi ble li
m
34. Click on f (find) next to User ID.
nt
OTM displays the Users search page.
u lika sfera
35. Enter a User Name of
ik H ran
YOURDOMAIN (for example,
a rth non-t
CORE101).
K 36. Click Search at the bottom of the
page.
SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-ATL9.
OTM returns to the Communication
and Remarks tab.
Adding the Service Provider Contact

Details
OTM displays the Service Provider
ID tab.
41. Click the Communication and
Remarks tab.
OTM displays the Communication
and Remarks tab.
OTM displays the Contact manager page in view
51. Click Finished.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Adding Service Provider Contact Details
Adding the Service Provider Contact Details
You successfully added details to your service provider contact for the BTT9 service provider.

You successfully created a service provider with an ID of ATL9. You also created a service
provider contact and added details for the contact.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Adding Service Provider Contact Details

Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification
Configuring Contact Notification
1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contact
Notification.
2. Enter a Contact Notification ID of SHIPMENT TENDER – DECLINED.
OTM ships with certain notify subject records.

4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Contact Notification manager.
 You can enable contact notification by contact, contact group (if your contact is defined
as a contact group), or involved party.
 Note the Contact ID. One to many contacts can subscribe to this event.
s a
 Note the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. You can specify a
communication method or choose BY CONTACT which enables OTM to use the ) h a
o m
ecฺ eฺ
ranked list of communication methods in each contact.
c l

o ra uid
Within the Communication Methods section, you can see the stylesheets used by each
tt@ ent G
communication method. If you have a stylesheet which is customized for your
company, you can specify it here.
u
5.
t
Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of DEMO.
n him Stud
6. Click v (view) next to Contact ID.
u lika this
OTM displays the Contact page.
th ikฺh use

(k ar se to
Within the Contacts section, note the Group Contact ID. Multiple contacts belong to
tt cen
a contact group. OTM can send a notification as a broadcast to more than one
u
hi ble li
m
contact using a contact group. In this example, there are two contacts associated
n t
with this contact group.

u l ikathe Contact
Within
s fera Notifications section, note the Subject. This is the event to
ik Hwhichrthis
a ncontact group subscribes. Multiple events can be listed.
r7.th Close t
nthe- Contact manager page.
K a no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification

Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification
Set up OTM so the planner receives a message when a tender is declined.
Notification.
2. Enter a Contact Notification ID of SHIPMENT TENDER – DECLINED.

4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Contact Notification manager.
6. Select the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER.
7. Click Save to the far right of the Contact ID field.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification

Solution – Configuring Contact Notification
You successfully set up contact notification for your PHOENIX DC PLANNER contact. When a
shipment tender is declined, OTM will notify the planner through message center.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Configuring Contact Notification

Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents

Creating an Automation Agent
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Automation Agent.
2. Enter an Agent ID of TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR.
4. Click the ID.

 Note the tabs in the Agent Manager.
 On the Agent Header tab, you define when the automation agent should run.
 On the Actions tab, you define what the automation agent does when it runs.
 On the Error Handler tab, you define actions to run if the first set of actions on
the Actions tab fails.
 Note the Active check box. OTM only runs automation agents when this check box
s a
is marked.
) h a
 m
Note the Event. The automation agent runs when this event occurs. You can enter
o
more than one event.
c lecฺ eฺ
5. Click the Actions tab.
ora uid
Note the icons.
u tt@ ent G
 Pencil – Displays
nthim Stud
ika this
the details of the
automation agent ul
action for editing
thikฺh use
its parameters.
(kar se to

u
Trash can – tt cen
hi ble li
m
Deletes an
nt
lika sfera
automation agent
uaction.
H ran
ik
rth non-t
 Green plus sign
K a (+) – Inserts a
new automation
agent action on
the row below.
6. Click Edit (the pencil
icon) to the right of
the SET
INDICTATOR: G
action.
Note the Indicator Value. Depending on the automation agent action selected, different
parameters are available.
7. Close the Agent Action Parameters page.
OTM returns to the Actions tab.
8. Click the Error Handler tab.
You can add additional actions to run if the first set of actions on the Actions tab fails.
Typically, these would notify a contact that an error has occurred.

Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Automation
Agent.
OTM displays the Agent Header tab.
3. Enter an Agent ID of TENDER

ACCEPTED INDICATOR.
4. Select an Agent Type of
SHIPMENT.
5. Mark the Active check box.
6. Enter an Event of SHIPMENT
TENDER – ACCEPTED.
s a
7. Click Save to the right of the
) h a
Restrictions field. om
8. Click View / Enter Actions at the bottom of the c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
page. OTM displays the Actions tab.
9. Click Add Action. u
OTM displays the Agent Action Selection For:
nthim Stud
TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR page.
ulika this
10. Select the Action of SET INDICATOR.
th ikฺh use
( k ar se to
11. Select the Indicator Value of G (green).
tt cen
u
th im l e
OTM returns to the Actions tab. li
k n
a at the ratopb of the page.
li
13. Click Finished
fe
ik Hudisplays
OTM
ra n s confirmation page.
the
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents

Solution – Creating an Automation Agent
You successfully created an automation agent with the ID of TENDER ACCEPTED
INDICATOR.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating an Automation Agent

s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances
Configuring a Rate Distance
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Contracts > Rate Distance.
OTM ships with certain rate distance records.
3. Click New at the top of the page.

 OTM uses the information on the rate distance to determine how to calculate
the distance from one location to another location.
 OTM uses the distance type and takes into account the distance cutoffs for
estimating purposes.
 Rate distance is used to either estimate or lookup distance when calculating a rate
or simulating service time.
4. Select a Distance Type of ESTIMATE. s a
) h a
When selected, OTM estimates the distance based on the latitude/longitude values on the
om
ecฺ eฺ
locations.
c l
5. Select a Distance Type of LOOKUP.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
When selected, OTM uses pre-defined distance values to determine the distance. These
u
values can be entered into OTM through the Shipment Management > Power Data >
thim Stud
Geography > Distance menu option. Or, OTM can communicate with third party software
n
to lookup distances.
ulika this
6.
thikฺh use
Mark the Estimate Allowed check box.
ar se to
When this check box is marked, OTM will use the pre-defined distance value if one exists
(k
or estimate the distance using the latitude/longitude values on the locations. The distance
tt cen
u
type should be set to LOOKUP if you selected the Estimate Allowed check box.
7.
nthi ble li
m
Enter a Short Distance Cutoff of 10 MI.
8. lika sfera
Enter a Short Distance Factor of 1.6
u
i

k H ran
To better estimate the distance, OTM multiples the estimated distances which are
a rth non-tshorter than the short distance cutoff with the short distance factor and uses the
K resulting value as the distance.
 In this example, for distances less than 10 miles, OTM multiples the calculated
distance by a factor of 1.6.
9. Enter a Long Distance Cutoff of 110 MI.
10. Enter a Long Distance Factor of 1.1
 To better estimate the distance, OTM multiples the estimated distances which are
longer than the long distance cutoff with the long distance factor and uses the resulting
value as the distance.
 In this example, for distances greater than 110 miles, OTM multiples the calculated
distance by a factor of 1.1.
 If the estimated distance value falls between the short distance cutoff and long
distance cutoff values, OTM prorates the distance factor between the defined
factors.
11. Note the External Distance Engine ID.
Instead of entering specific distances into OTM, OTM can communicate with third party
software to lookup distances. Please refer to the latest documentation for a current list
of supported software.

Configuring Distance in OTM
If you select a Distance Type of LOOKUP, OTM uses pre-defined distance values to determine
the distance. These values can be entered directly into OTM or OTM can communicate with
third party software to lookup distances. Let’s look at where you can set up these pre-defined
distance values within OTM.
12. Click Shipment Management > Power Data > Geography > Distance.
13. Enter a Lane ID of AZ-SD.

OTM displays the Distance results page.
15. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Distance Lookup view
page.
Each distance in OTM must specify a
lane ID, a rate distance ID, and a value.
s a
16. Click the Lane ID of AZ-SD.
) h a
OTM displays the Lane Definitions view o m
page in a new window.
c lecฺ eฺ
 The lane connects two geographic points. The geographic points o racan beuspecific,
id such
@ nt
as a street address, or more general, such as a state orttregion. G
im u dedistance value
to whichuthe

t
For distances, lanes define the start and end pointh
n Arizona
applies. In this example, the lane is generalafrom
t
Sto San Diego, California.
lik h i s
t you are going to want
 If you are using distance values to ฺh
k u srates,
calculate e
r
your distances to be very specific. i
th to u
17. Close the Lane Definitions (view a
k page. se
u tt en
him lic page.
OTM returns to the Distance Lookup
t e
 Note then
a Rate b
Distance
a l ID. This tells OTM how to calculate the distance. OTM ships
with
u s er
likthree options:
f
i H
k  ESTIMATEr anlocations.
– OTM estimates the rate distance based on the latitude and longitude
th
r non -
ont the
Ka  LOOKUP ONLY – OTM uses the distance tables or a third-party software package
to calculate distance.
 LOOKUP ELSE ESTIMATE – OTM first tries use the distance tables or a third-party
software packaged to calculate distances. If a result is not returned, then OTM
estimates the distance based on the latitude and longitude on the locations.
 Note the Value. This is the distance value which applies to the lane specified in the
Lane ID field.
 In this example, the distance from Arizona to San Diego, California is 355 miles.

Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services
Creating a Rate Service
In this guided demonstration, the focus is on rate services that relate to truckload. Rate
services associated with other modes are covered in later lessons.
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Service.
2. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL.

4. Click the ID.
 Note the Rate Service Type. There are a number of rate service types available which
calculate transit time based on different factors. Depending on the rate service type
selected, the fields on the Rate Service Details tab are different.
 In this example, the rate service type of SIMULATION calculates transit time based
on the distance and speed you define on the Rate Service Details tab as well as any
s a
time windows you have defined on other OTM objects such as locations.
) h a
 Note the Time Window Tolerance: Enter a numeric value for the number of hours you
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
want to add to the pickup and delivery times for shipments. The value you enter adds
o ra uid
to the allowable late times established for pickup and delivery at shipment locations.

u tt@ ent G
Note the When the Ignore Delivery Location Calendar check box: When this check box
him Stud
is selected, the drive routing ignores the delivery location calendar. This only applies to
Day Duration and Distance Duration. n t
 Note the Max Weight Time per Stop: u likisathe maximum
This th is time allowed to wait to
pickup or drop off goods.
th ikฺh use
r eThis to is used to configure a wait time associated

(kaafterTime:
Note the Max Long Haul Wait
with the first deliveryttstop s
nfirst delivery
between the lastim u
pickup li
and c e
the
a long haul. There can be a large amount of time
stop so use this field to accommodate
th
n for the e
bl haul move.
ik a
a wait time
l Rate Service r along
5. Click u
H
the
n s fe Details tab.
r th ik Note
n - trthea HOS Rule Set ID: Indicates which hours of service rules to honor for this
Ka noassociated with it are considered "fresh" at the start of the shipment, and rest time will
rate service. When a shipment is created using this rate service type, the HOS rules
be inserted into the shipment as required by the rules. An HOS rule set contains a set
of HOS rules that when honored, verifies a driver is complying with department of
transportation requirements. HOS rule sets are used in external drive and simulation
types of rate services.
 Note the Initial Rest Time. If a driver is not fully rested, OTM can take into account
an initial rest time and factor this into the transit time.
 Note the Distance, Speed, and Min Transit Time fields.
 OTM uses distance and speed values to calculate the rate service speed (or how
long the trip takes).
 The min transit time is the absolute minimum time it takes to move from one
location to another. OTM uses this time if the calculated transit time is less than the
minimum transit time.
 For example, a truck is traveling a distance of 90 miles. OTM calculates the
transit time as 90MI / 45MPH = 2H (hours) and then adds any time windows
required. If

you have set a min transit time of 3 hours, OTM will use that value if the calculated
time is less than the min transit time.
Creating a Rate Service with Different Rate Service Types

The Rate Service Details tab looks different depending on the rate service type selected. We’ll
look at a couple examples.
6. Click the Rate Service Header tab.
7. Select a Rate Service Type of LOOKUP.

8. Click the Rate Service Details tab.
In this example, you define the transit time for each lane. A lane connects two geographical
points and can be specific (i.e. a street address) or general (i.e. city, province, country, or
region). For example, the transit time between US zip code 19406 and the location Los
Angeles General Store is three days, 18 hours, and 30 minutes.
s a
10. Select a Rate Service Type of GROUNDSERVICE.
) h a
o m
lecฺ eฺ
In this example, you are using a repetition schedule to determine the frequency and
c
ra uid
location routing for a shipment. These are typically created for repetitive rail and
o
tt@ ent G
truck routes.
u
him Stud
13. Select a Rate Service Type of EXTERNALDRIVE.
n t
u lika this

th kฺhexplanation
Note the HOS Rule Set ID. See ithe u se under the rate service type
of simulation.
(k ar se to

u tt Engine
Note the External Service
c e n ID. You can refer to a third party software package
t m
hi blfor
which communicates l
with i
e a currentandlistprovides
OTM transit time information. Refer to the
n
a Service
era Header tab.
latest documentation of supported third party software.
15. Click u likRate
the sf
16. ik
H ranService Type of DISTANCEDURATION.
a r17. -t next to Calendar.
th Clickoln(list)
Select a Rate
K n
18. Select any calendar.
OTM requires a calendar when the rate service type is DISTANCEDURATION to account
for holidays and weekends.
OTM returns to the Rate Service Header tab.
In this case, you define the transit time in number of days within a distance radius. You can
define your distance in mileage bands and, for each band, specify the transit time.
22. Select a Rate Service Type of DAYDURATION.
This rate service type also requires a calendar.
This rate service type is similar to DISTANCEDURATION, but you define the transit time
per lane instead of per mileage bands. You specify the lane and the corresponding service

days. You can also set this up by rate zone. This rate service type may be used for LTL,
parcel, or rail rates.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Service.
OTM displays the Rate Service Header tab.
3. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL.

4. Select the Rate Service Type of SIMULATION.
5. Click Details at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Rate Service Details tab.
6. Enter a Distance of 10 MI.
7. Enter a Speed of 20 MPH.
8. Click Save to the right of the Min Transit
s a
Time field.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
Time field.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ika this
ul
kฺh use
Time field.
thi
(kar se to
u tt cen
hi ble li
m
nt
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload

Solution – Creating Rate Services for Truckload
You successfully created a rate service with an ID of SIMULATION TL.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Rate Services for Truckload

Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings
Creating a Rate Offering
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering.
2. Enter an Offering ID of BTT9 TL.
4. Click the ID.

OTM displays the Rate Header tab.
5. Click the Offering Type drop-down list to see the valid offering types.
 The Offering Type field determines the attributes OTM displays on the Attributes tab.
OTM ships with a list of offering types. Refer to the online help for an explanation of
these pre-defined rate offering types.
You can also define your own offering types.

s a
6. Note the following fields:
) h a
o m
ecฺ eฺ
 Note the Service Provider ID. In most cases, a contract, or rate offering, always has
c l
a service provider defined. One exception is for LTL rates where you have a
o ra uid
published rate which all LTL service providers can use. Service providers usually
provide discounts off of the published rate.
u tt@ ent G
Note the Rate Service ID. Every rate offering mustim

n th haveSatrateudservice specified
ika mode isfor which this rate offering is
for OTM to calculate transit time.
Note the Transport Mode. Define theu l th
kฺh modes. se
 transport
th i
valid. OTM ships with a list of transport u
 (k
Note the Perspective. Definear whether
s e o rate offering is valid for buy shipments, sell
tthis
shipments, or both.u tt cen
t m
hi Specifyle lithe effective and expiration dates for which this rate offering

n
Note the Version.
k a erab
 HNote
li
is valid.
s f
u thenExchange
ik tra Rate ID. You can define an exchange rate to be used with this rate
a rth  noNote
n- the Active check box.
offering. This exchange rate is used by OTM when calculating cost.
K Mark this check box to indicate a rate offering is active
and can be used during planning.
 Note the Sourcing Template and Sourcing Rate options. These options only pertain
when you are using Oracle Transportation Sourcing to source your rates.
 Note the many fields for minimum and maximum values related to dimensions and
distance. A rate offering will only be used if the shipment being planned honors
these constraints.
7. Click the Attributes tab.
OTM displays the Attributes tab.
 Note the Stops Included in Rate of 2. This indicates the number of free stops
included in the rate before stop-off charges apply. Shipments must have a minimum
of two stops: a pickup stop and a delivery stop.
 Note the Total All Stops of 4. This indicates the total number of pickup stops and
delivery stops this rate offering supports. In this case, the rate offering supports the
2 stops included in the rate plus 2 additional stops. If this field is not populated, OTM
assumes that an unlimited number of stops are supported by this rate offering.

 Note the Pickup Stops of 1.
 Note the Delivery Stops of 3.
 The sum of your Pickup Stops field and Delivery Stops field must equal the Total All
Stops field. You can also leave these fields blank to allow any combination of pickup
and delivery stops.
 Note the Low Stop of 1 and High Stop of 1.
 This indicates the first stop in addition to the stops included in rate.
 In this example, if a shipment is built with one additional stop above the
stops included in the rate, OTM charges 105.00 USD more.
 Note the Low Stop of 2 and High Stop of 2.
 This indicates the second stop in addition to the stops included in rate.
 In this example, if a shipment is built with two additional stops above the stops
included in the rate, OTM charges 105.00 USD for the first stop and 130.00 USD
a
for the second stop.
 Note: The sum of your highest High Stop field and Stops Included in Rate field) h
as
should equal the Total All Stops field. In this example, you have:
le ฺcom ฺ
 Stops Included in Rate of 2 PLUS
orac uide
 High Stop of 2 EQUALS
u tt@ nt G
 Total All Stops of 4
th im tude
 Note the Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY.
k an For s S offering, OTM uses this
this rate
i
u l
rate distance to calculate the distance betweeni th
the locations. For certain offering
h
ฺ
ik o us
types, a rate distance is not required. e
rth t are the Circuity Allows Percentage, Circuity
aCircuityswhich

Distance Cost, Maximum k
Note the fields related to circuity
(
ttto determine e
n the cost for
Penalty, and Maximum Circuity Distance fields. You
can use these m u
i you expect
fields l c e
i to be about 100 miles,
out of route miles. So if your rate covers
two stops n th
which
b le you can allow for a small out of
a a
er For example, there were originallyandtwothenstops
likthat percentage.
route
u
Hcovered
over n s f
distance of an additional 10% or 10 more miles, charge for anything
(A and B) which
ik ra
a rth norouten-t and100 miles, but a stop C was added which caused the shipment to go out of
K brought the total miles to 120. You could charge an additional out of route or
circuity cost for the extra 10 miles.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload
Creating a Rate Offering for Truckload
3. Enter an Offering ID of BTT9 TL.

4. Select an Offering Type of TL.
5. Enter a Service Provider ID of
BTT9 (from previous exercise).
6. Enter a Rate Service ID of
SIMULATION TL (from previous
exercise).
7. Select a Transport Mode of TL. s a
8. Select a Perspective of Buy. ) h a
om
9. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018
c lecฺ eฺ
(already created).
ora uid
tt@ ent G
10. Click Attributes at the bottom of the
u
him Stud
page. OTM displays the Attributes tab.
nt
11. Enter a Stops Included in Rate of 2.
12. Enter a Total All Stops of 4.
ulika this
13. Enter Pickup Stops of 1.
thikฺh use
(kar se to
14. Enter Delivery Stops of 3.
u tt cen
15. Enter a Low Stop of 1.
nthi ble li
m
16. Enter a High Stop of 1.
lika sfera
17. Enter a Per Stop Charge of 105.00 USD.
u
k H ran
18. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop
i
a rth non-t
Charge field.
K 19. Enter a Low Stop of 2.
22. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop
Charge field.
23. Enter a Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP
ONLY.

25. Click Create Another. (Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management >
Rate Offering)
26. Enter an Offering ID of ATL9 TL.
27. Select an Offering Type of TL.
Copyright ATL9
© 2014, (from
Oracle and/orprevious
its affiliates. Allexercise).
rights reserved.
29. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload TL (from previous exercise).
30. Select a Transport Mode of TL. Chapter 1 - Page 168
31. Select a Perspective of Buy.
32. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018 (already created).
34. Enter a Stops Included In Rate of 2.
35. Enter a Total All Stops of 3.
36. Enter Pickup Stops of 1.
37. Enter Delivery Stops of 2.
38. Enter a Low Stop of 1.

41. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop Charge field.
42. Enter a Rate Distance of LOOKUP ONLY.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

Solution – Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload
You successfully created a rate offering with an ID of BTT9 TL.
You successfully created a rate offering with an ID of ATL9 TL.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records
Creating a Rate Record for Truckload
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record.
OTM displays the Rate Offering search tab. Whenever you create a new rate record,
you must associate it with a rate offering.
4. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9 AZ-CA.
6. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Lane Info tab.
 There are options that can be specified on both the rate offering and rate record. As
s a
both places. The rate record is more specific than the rate offering. ) h a
a general principle, OTM uses the value in the more specific object if it is specified in
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
 For example, the stop-off charges that were discussed in the rate offering lesson
ra uid
can also be specified on the rate record. If stop-off charges are specified in both
places, the data on the rate record is used. o G with a rate
u ttbe@associated
n t
derate offering.
 Note the Rate Offering ID. Every rate record must
th
offering. You can have multiple rate records associatedim withtuone
7. Click the Source Geo Hierarchy drop-down k
li an his S
list.
ฺhu the
The geo hierarchy drop-down listkdefines e t start and end points for the

i sgeneral
u this information.
thbe usedtoto define
rate record. Regions can also
a r

t t (k ngeo
You can select the appropriate sehierarchy for the rate you are defining. In this
im
example, the sourceu lic e
geo hierarchy is STATE/PROVINCE.
th
n raGeo e
bl Hierarchy drop-down list.
ik a
8. Click the Destination

H ul hierarchies.
Note
sfe geo hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. You can combine different
the destination
n
th ik -tra
geo For example, from location to country.
r  noThe n source geo hierarchy and destination geo hierarchy determine the fields
Ka that appear on the Attributes tab.
9. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page.
 Note the Source Geography Province Code of AZ. OTM can only use this rate record if
the potential shipment departs from Arizona. Since we specified STATE/PROVINCE as
our source geo hierarchy on the Lane Info tab, the source geography is province code.
 Note the Destination Geography Province Code of CA. OTM can only use this
rate record if the potential shipment arrives in California.
 This is also where you set up rate record specific stop-off information. If you enter
stop- off information here, it overrides stop-off information defined on the rate offering.
10. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Rate Costs tab.
 Note the Multi-Costs Rule drop-down list. You can define many costs on this page. The
multi-cost rule determines how OTM should combine these costs into one total cost.
 Add – OTM adds all valid costs listed on the Rate Costs tab and determines a
final total for the shipment.

 Minimum – OTM calculates the lowest valid cost and uses that for the shipment.
 Maximum – OTM calculates the highest valid cost and uses that for the shipment.
 Note this rate record contains one rate cost. If this rate record is used for a
buy shipment, a rate cost of 600.00 USD per shipment is applied.
11. Click Add A Cost at the bottom of the page.
The Rates page contains the following sections:
 Conditions define when OTM should apply a rate cost. Up to 4 conditional rules can
exist for each rate cost. If you have multiple conditional rules, you can specify how
they relate to each other:
 AND – All the rules must be satisfied for this rate cost to be applied.
 OR – One of the rules must be satisfied for this rate cost to be applied.
 SELECTED – OTM finds valid matches for your first conditional rule and then
only passes those matches onto the next conditional rule.
s a
 Charge defines what costs OTM should apply when shipments meet the criteria
specified in the Conditions section. ) h a
o m
 There are 4 Cost Types to choose from:
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
 Charge – You can enter an Amount, a Basis, and the Unit. There are many basis
o
tt@ ent G
options available such as per shipment, per weight, per distance, etc. You can
u
limit the basis options OTM displays in the list by marking only certain basis
t him Stud
options as enabled or select the basis options you want to display per rate
n
offering type.
lik a hi s
 Discount – You can enter an ฺh u e t Of percentage which applies a
ik
h total
discount to the current trunning s
Apply Discount
uof shipment costs.
a r to
(kenternansExternal
ttrating
 External – You can e Rating Engine ID if the rate is determined
im u
by an external
l e
icup unit breaks such as weight or volume breaks.
engine.
t
 Profileh
n rabl
– You cane set
ik
 lYou
acan
H u costs,nyou
s fecanspecify
also a Minimum Charge or a Maximum Charge. If you define many
th ik non - a setting of the Multi-Costs Rule drop-down list, OTM selects the appropriate
trthe
define certain rate costs as the minimum or maximum. Depending
r no rate cost.
Ka
 Options define the type of rate you entered in the Charge section. You must indicate if
the cost is normal, minimum, maximum, or weighted. You can also add addition rate
information such as rounding details.
 Miscellaneous defines tariff information about the schedule of prices that a service
provider publishes for the movement of freight.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload
3. Enter a Rate Offering ID of BTT9 TL (previously created).

OTM displays the Rate Offering results page.
5. Ensure the option button next to BTT9 TL is marked.
s a
7. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9
AZ-CA. ) h a
om
8. Select the Source Geo Hierarchy
c lecฺ eฺ
of STATE/PROVINCE.
ora uid
9. Select the Destination Geo
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
nt
ulika this
hikฺh use
11. Enter the Source Geography Province
t
Code of AZ.
(kar se to
u tt cen
12. Enter the Destination Geography
hi ble li
m
Province Code of CA.
nt
lika sfera
u
H ran
ik
a rth non-t
K OTM displays the Rates page.
15. Ensure a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
16. Enter an Amount of 600.00 USD.
17. From the Basis drop-down list, select
Shipment.
OTM returns to the Rate Costs tab.
Creating Rate Record for Truckload

20. Click Contract and Rate
Management > Contract
Management > Rate Record.
22. Enter a Rate Offering ID of ATL9 TL.
24. Ensure the option button next to ATL9 TL is marked.
26. Enter a Rate Record ID of ATL9 850-CA.
27. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3.
28. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
30. Enter a Source Geography Postal Code
of 850.
31. Enter a Destination Geography
Province Code of CA.
OTM displays the Rates page.
s a
34. Ensure a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
Shipment.
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ika this
page. ul
th
OTM displays the confirmation page.ikฺh use
( k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Creating Rate Records for Truckload
You successfully created a rate record with an ID of BTT9 AZ-CA.
You successfully created a rate record with an ID of ATL9 850-CA.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Rate Records for Truckload

Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences
Creating a Rate Preference
Rate preference enables you to configure preferred rates for a lane or rate zone. When
OTM plans shipments, it will use one of the rates on this preferred list.
Note: The transport mode is important for rate preference since OTM also considers
all applicable rates for transport modes with no rate preference defined.
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Preference.
2. Enter a Rate Preference ID of AZ CA TL.
OTM displays the Rate Preference results page.
4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Rate Preference manager.
s a
 Note the Lane ID and Rate Zone Profile ID fields. OTM only uses this rate preference
)
for shipments in the geographic area defined by the lane and/or rate zone profile. A h a
o m
ecฺ yourerate
rate zone profile can contain multiple lanes.
 Note the Effective Date and Expiration Date fields. You can define c
a l
when
d ฺ
preference is valid. r
o Gu i
u tt@ n t should
 Note the Rate Offering ID. List the preferred rate offerings
e
which OTM
consider in the specified geographic area.
n thim Stud
u lika this
kฺh to specify
seit in a parameter set. Defining
Enabling a Rate Preference
th i u
ar OTM toto
Once you create a rate preference, you need
tt (k
parameters in a parameter set enables
n s e build shipments based on your
business process.
5. Click Shipmenth im u li>cePower Data > General > Parameter Sets.
a n t Set bIDleof RATE PREF ON.
Management
lik
6. Enter a Parameter
u fe ra
7. ClickH Search a s
nat the bottom of the page.
ik tr
a r8.th Click
OTM
o n - the Parameter Sets results page.
displays
n the ID.
K
9. Click the Collapse All button at the bottom of the page.
 Note the different sections of the parameter set page. You can set parameters for Bulk
Plan, Container Optimization, Multistop, and other areas as well. OTM ships with a
default setting for each parameter which you can override based on your business
processes.
10. Locate the Bulk Plan section and click the + sign next to BULK PLAN.
The Bulk Plan section expands and you now see all of the bulk plan parameters.
 Note the first column defines the parameter name.
 Note the second column defines the default value for the parameter.
 Note the third column defines the override value if one is selected.
11. Scroll down to the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter.
 Note there are 3 values available for the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter:
 0.Do Not Use Preferred Rates – This is the default value. If you do not set this
parameter to something other than the default value, OTM disregards your
rate

preferences while planning shipments and looking up rates in the international rate
query.
 1.Preferred Rates Only – This tells OTM to only use preferred rates. Non-
preferred rates will not be considered during planning.
 2.Preferred Rates If Available – This tells OTM to use preferred rates if they are
specified. If preferred rates have not been specified, then OTM can consider
non- preferred rates during planning.
 Once you create a new parameter set, you can assign it to your domain or
user preferences so OTM will use it during planning. If you are manually
planning a shipment, certain shipment actions enable you to select a
parameter set.
Note: The online documentation contains a description for each parameter in the
parameter set. From the parameter set page, click the Help link at the top of the page. On
the parameter sets help page, click the link to view the List of Parameters topic.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Preference.
OTM displays the Rate Preference manager.
3. Enter a Rate Preference ID of AZ CA TL.

5. Enter a Lane ID of AZ-CA (already created).
6. Click l (list) next to the Rate Offering ID.
7. Mark the check box next to ATL9 TL.
8. Mark the check box next to BTT9 TL.
s a
) h a
OTM returns to the Rate Preference
o m
manager.
c lecฺ eฺ
10. Click Save to the right of Rate Offering ID
o ra uid
field.
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
ika this
ul
thikฺh use
k ar you
In addition to creating a rate preference,
( s e to tell OTM you want to consider preferred
must
rates during planning.
u tt cen
th im
12. Click Shipment Management
le li> Power Data > General > Parameter Sets.
13. Click New a
k n rabof the page.
li at the bottom
fe
ik Hudisplays
OTM
ra n s Parameter Set page.
the
th Enter
r14. n t
a -Parameter Set ID of RATE
K a n o
PREF ON.
15. Within the Bulk Plan section, scroll to
the USE RATE PREFERENCE
parameter.
16. Select a Parameter Value of 2.
Preferred Rates If Available.
17. Click Finished at the top of the Parameter Set page.
Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences

Solution – Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences
You successfully created a rate preference with an ID of AZ CA TL.

You successfully set the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter to 2. Preferred Rates If
Available.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality
Creating a Rate Quality
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate
Quality Factors.
2. Enter a Rate Quality ID of AZ-CA.
4. Click the ID.

You can define rate quality to help weigh rate offerings or rate records. This enables you
to:
 Ensure that rates for a certain service provider do not qualify for a shipment or
Ensure a specific rate is chosen even if it does not result in the best planned cost
Note the Adjustment Percent and Adjustment Flat fields.
s a
 To reduce the weighted cost, enter a percentage value between 0-99 or a negative
flat amount. By reducing the weighted cost, you are making service providers look ) h a
o m
ecฺ eฺ
more attractive to OTM during planning.
c l
ra uid
 To increase the weighted cost, enter a percent value larger than 100 or a positive
o
tt@ ent G
flat amount. By increasing the weighted cost, you are making service providers look
less attractive to OTM during planning.
u
n thim Stud
ikitato a rateisoffering or rate record. In this
Assigning the Rate Quality to a Rate Record
ul th
kฺh use
Once you create a rate quality, you need to assign
th i
example, you are assigning it to a rate record.
(k
5. Click Contract and Rate Management ar se> tContract
o Management > Rate Record.
6. Enter a Rate Record u tt
ID of BTT9e n
7. Click Search atth im li c AZ-CA.
a n the bottom
a b leof the page.
8. Click the ID.
s er
uthelikAttributes
f
ik H
9. Click
ra n tab.
rth Innthe - t
nMiscellaneous
K a o section, note the Rate Quality ID assigned to this rate record.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality
With your rate preference, Big Texan Trucking and Antelope Line are the preferred carriers. Of
those two, even though Big Texan Trucking has a higher flat charge, they provide superior
service, so you want OTM to select them as the carrier instead of Antelope Line.

Quality Factors.
OTM displays the Rate Quality page.
4. Enter an Adjustment Flat of –
250.00 USD.
s
Since you are specifying a negative amount, the rates to which you attach this rate a
quality will look more attractive during planning in OTM.
) h a
5. Click Finished at the top of the page. om
OTM displays a confirmation page. c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality

Solution – Creating a Rate Quality
You successfully created a rate quality with an ID of AZ-CA.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating a Rate Quality

Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality
By assigning your rate quality to your Big Texan Trucking rate record, you are ensuring this rate
record looks more attractive during planning as compared to the rates for Antelope Line.
Assign a Rate Quality to a Rate Record

2. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9 AZ-CA.

OTM displays the Rate Record results page.
4. Click the ID.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality

Solution – Assigning a Rate Quality
Assign a Rate Quality to a Rate Record
You successfully assigned your rate quality to the BTT9 AZ-CA rate record.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Assigning a Rate Quality

Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates
Querying for Truckload Rates
1. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle taskbar.
2. Ensure that Rates is selected in the Find drop-down list.
3. In the Ship From section, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC.
4. In the Ship To section, enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE.

Location data is required for OTM to find your rates.
5. In the Additional Constraints section, enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of
48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.
OTM should return both your Big Texan Trucking rate and your Antelope Line rate.
7. Enter the results of the rate query below:
s a
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
Rate Offering ID for
ATL9
c l
ora uid
tt@ ent G
Cost
u
im tud
Enter a n thResults…S
Field
lik Your
h i s
ik ฺhu use t
BTT9
a rth to
Cost
u tt (k cense
n thim ble li
a Inquiry
Querying for Rates
likNew eraat the bottom of the results page.
8. Click uthe
H raFrom s f
n section, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC.
9. ik t
r th -
In the Ship
onShip To section, enter a Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.
Ka 10. Innthe
OTM should return both your Big Texan Trucking rate and your
Antelope Line rate.
12. Enter the resultsField
of the rate query below:Enter Your Results…

ATL9
Cost

BTT9
Cost
Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates

Solution – Querying for Truckload Rates
You successfully queried for rates.

OTM displays the following results:
Rate Offering ID for ATL9 TL

ATL9
Cost 550.00 USD

Rate Offering ID for BTT9 TL
s a
BTT9
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
Cost 600.00 USD
c l
ora uid
tt@ ent G
OTM displays the following results: u
im tud
Enter Yourth
a hi s S
n
Field Results…
lik
Rate Offering ID for ATL9
ik ฺhu use t
TL
ATL9
a rth to
Cost
tt (k nseUSD
550.00
im u lice
n h ble
tField
lik a e ra Enter Your Results…
n f
HuRateraOffering
s ID for BTT9 TL
ik t
a rth non- BTT9
K Cost 600.00 USD
Solution – Querying for Truckload Rates

Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than
Truckload
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles
Viewing an Existing Weight Break Profile
Unit Break Profiles.
2. Enter a Rate Unit Break Profile ID of LTL WEIGHT BREAKS.
4. Click the ID.

This is an example of a rate unit break defining a weight break. There are a total of 6
bands and each contains a maximum weight. For example, the rate unit break ID of 00501-
01000 is a weight range from 501 LB to 1000 LB.
Creating a Weight Break Profile

5. Click New at the top of the page.
s a
6. Click the Lookup Type drop-down list.
) h a
Note the three lookup types:
o m

c lecฺ eฺ
CONTINUOUS RANGE – Specified by min values – OTM matches an actual value to
o ra uid
a range between the break values you define where the range is defined as an
inclusive minimum.
u tt@ ent G

n t him Stud
CONTINUOUS RANGE – Specified by max values – OTM matches an actual value to
ika this
a range between the break values you define where the range is defined as an
inclusive maximum.
ul
ฺh uanseactual value to the exact value defined in
 LOOKUP EXACT VALUE – OTM
th ikmatches
the break value field.
(k ar se to
7. Select a Lookup Type of
u ttCONTINUOUS
c e n RANGE – Specified by max values.
t m
hi drop-down li
e list.
8. Click the Data Type
n b l
u li athe stype
There arekdifferent
f rofarate
edata types available including UNIT OF MEASURE. The data type
ik H
determines
ra n unit break you are creating.
a-tData Type of UNIT OF MEASURE.
a th Select
r9.10. o n
K n the UOM Type drop-down list.
Click
Depending on the data type selected, you may be able to select a UOM type. By selecting
a data type of UNIT OF MEASURE, you must also specify the UOM type.
11. Select a UOM Type of WEIGHT.
 Note the Rate Unit Break ID. This must be unique across all rate unit break profiles
in your domain.
 Note the Break Value. Depending on the lookup type selected, enter the rate unit break
as a minimum, maximum, or exact value.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating
Rate Records
Viewing a Base Rate Offering
2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of PUBLISHED LTL.

4. Click the ID.
Since the rate offering is in a different domain, OTM displays the Rate Offering view
page.
 Note the Service Provider ID. Since many service providers offer discounts off of this
published rate, you can leave the Service Provider ID blank. Each master rate will
have a specific service provider.
 Note the Offering Type. You define published LTL contracts as LTL – BASE which s a
) h
shows as LTL BASE TARIFF. This is the only offering type that does not require you toa
enter a service provider.
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
Creating a Base Rate Record
o ra uid
5. Click Actions > Contract and Rate > Change Rates > Create
u n tG
tt@RateeRecord.
t im tud
hRATE.
6. Enter a Rate Record ID of DEMO PUBLISHED
lik a hi s S
n
LTL
7. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of COUNTRY.
ik ฺhu use t
8. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy
a rth of COUNTRY.
to Geo Hierarchy. Typically these are broader
( k
tt basecrate
Note the Source Geo Hierarchy s e
nthan for the master rates. For example, your base
and Destination
geographical areas foruthe e
m li
hai geo bhierarchy
n t
rates could have
a a le of state-state and your master rates could use 3-digit US
lik satfethe
zip codes.
uAttributes r
9. Click
ik H r a n bottom of the page.
r10. t
th OTMondisplays
- the Attributes tab.
K a n
Enter a Source Geography Country
Code ID of USA.
11. Enter a Destination Geography Country
Code ID of USA.
13. Click Add A Cost.
14. In the Conditions section, select a Basis of
Ship Unit Line Item NMFC Class.
15. Select an Operator of =.
16. Enter a Value(s) of 60.0 for the NMFC
Class.
Note the conditional rule of Ship Unit Line Item NMFC Class = 60.0. OTM can only use
this rate cost if the items on the order have an NMFC Class of 60.0.
17. In the Charge section, select a Cost Type of Profile.
This lets OTM know thatCopyright
you want
© 2014,to useand/or
Oracle a rate unit All
its affiliates. break profile. The Rates
rights reserved.
page refreshes to show additional fields.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records
18. Select a Rate Unit Break Profile ID 1 of LTL
Chapter 1 - PageWEIGHT 192 BREAKS.
19. Enter a Selector of Shipment Total Weight.
20. Select a Basis of Shipment Total Weight.
21. Enter a Unit of 100 LB.
To define this as a per cwt rate, enter a basis Shipment Total Weight, a unit of 100 and a
unit of measure of LB.
22. Click Edit Unit Breaks to add the costs for each weight band.
23. For the Max 500 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 4.00 USD.
29. Click Save at the bottom of the Rate Unit Break page.
30. Click Save at the bottom of the Rates page.
s a
31. Close the Rate Record page.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records
Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate
Records
Viewing a Master Rate Offering
2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of LON9 LTL.

4. Click the ID.
 Note the Offering Type. For discount rates off of a published rate, you select LTL –
MASTER.
 Note the Service Provider ID. You must enter the service provider for which this
contract is valid.
s a
) h a
Note the Base Rate Offering. This defines the published rate for which the service
o m
provider is offering a discount.
c lecฺ eฺ
o ra uid
tt@ ent G
Viewing a Master Rate Record
6. Click Actions at the top of the page. u
7. Click OK in the message box.
n thim Stud
8. Click Contract and Rate > View > Show Related
u lika Rateth s
iRecords.
9. Click Edit at the top of the Rate Record
th ikฺhview page.
u se
k
( ar se to
utt licthe
Note the Source Geo Hierarchy
specific than whatiism
andnDestination Geo Hierarchy. Typically, this is more
e base rate.
a n th tab.
defined on
Costs a b le
OTM u lik the
10. Click the Rate
f r Costs tab.
eRate
H s
anpencil icon) to the right of the Description
displays
th
11. ikClick Edit
- tr(the
r noOTM n displays the Rates page.
Ka field.
 Note the Cost Type. The cost type of Discount tells OTM to apply the specified
discount to the rate.
 In the Charge section, note the Apply Discount Of field. OTM calculates a total cost
of 80% of the published rate for this lane.
12. Close the Rates page.
Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records

Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings
Creating a Master Rate Offering
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate
Offering.
3. Enter an Offering ID of LON9 LTL.

4. Select an Offering Type of LTL -
MASTER.
LON9 (already created).
6. Enter a Rate Service ID of LTL AZ
CA (already created).
s a
7. Select a Transport Mode of LTL.
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
c l
9. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018
ora uid
tt@ ent G
(already created).
10. Click Attributes at the bottom of the u
nthim Stud
11. Enter a Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP
ulika this
ONLY.
12. Enter a Base Rate Offering of rth
ikฺh o use
(k a se t
uttof thelicpage.
en
PUBLISHED LTL (already created).
m
13. Click Finished at ithe top
th confirmation
le page.
a
OTM displaysn the
a b
H ulik nsfer
r th ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings

Solution – Creating Master Rate Offerings
You successfully created a master rate offering with an ID of LON9 LTL.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Master Rate Offerings

Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records
Creating a Master Rate Record
OTM displays the rate offering search page. Whenever you create a new rate record, you
have to associate your rate record with a rate offering.
3. Enter a Rate Offering ID of LON9 LTL (from previous exercise).

6. Enter a Rate Record ID of LON9
s a
850-921.
7. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy ) h a
om
of USZIP3.
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Select a Destination Geo
ora uid
tt@ ent G
Hierarchy of USZIP3.
u
him Stud
nt
10. Enter a Source Geography Postal Code
u l ika this
of 850.
t hikฺh use
kar se to
11. Enter a Destination Geography Postal
(
Code of 921.
12. Click Rate Costs iatm
utt licofethe
n
n th e
the bottom
l page.
lik
OTM displays
f rabCosts tab.
a the eRate
13. Click u s
ik H ra n
Add A Cost.
a th OTM
r14. o n -t the Rates page.
displays
K n a Cost Type of Discount.
Select
15. Enter an Apply Discount Of of 20 %.
Querying for Rates

18. Click the Rates link within the Ask
Oracle taskbar.
19. Select a Find option of Rates.
20. Enter the Ship From Location ID of
PHOENIX DC.
21. Enter the Ship To Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.
22. Scroll down to the Transport Modes section.
23. Enter a Transport Mode ID of©LTL.
Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
24.
Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records Transport Modes grid.
Click Save to the far right of the
25. Scroll down to the Commodities section Chapter which
1 - Page is197at the
very bottom of the page.
26. Select a Flexible Commodity Qualifier of
29. Enter a Ship Unit Count of 1.
32. Click Save to the far right of the Commodities grid.
34. Enter the results of the rate query below:

LON9
Cost
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records

Solution – Creating Master Rate Records
Creating a Master Rate Record
You successfully created a master rate record with an ID of LON9 850-921.
Querying for Rates

Rate Offering ID for LON9 LTL

LON9
Cost 121.28 USD
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Master Rate Records

Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries
Viewing an Itinerary
1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager.
2. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.
4. Click the ID.

 Note the Perspective. This determines whether OTM can use this itinerary for
buy shipments, sell shipments, or both (ALL).
 Note the Itinerary Type.
 Active means the itinerary is used in shipment planning.
 Inactive means the itinerary is not used in shipment planning.
 Manual means the itinerary should only be used when running certain shipment
s a
actions.
) h a
 m
Note the Source Geo Hierarchy and the Destination Geo Hierarchy. These define the
o
l
general start and end information of a lane.
c ecฺ eฺ

ora uid
Note the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box. This must be marked for OTM to build a
multistop shipment.
u tt@ ent G

him Stud
In the Details section, you can limit the use of this itinerary by requiring an order to
nt
ika this
be within certain weight and volume limits.
5.
ul
Click the Lane Definitions tab.

thikฺh use
Note that the fields on this tab change depending on the source and destination geo
kar se to
hierarchies selected on the Parameters tab. For example, if you selected a source geo
(
u tt cen
hierarchy of POSTAL_CODE on the Parameters tab, OTM displays a Postal Code field
hi ble li
m
on the Lane Definitions tab.
nt
lika sfera
 Note the Source and Destination Geography Province Code fields. In this example,
u the source geography province code is AZ and the destination geography province
H ran
ik code is CA. This itinerary will only be used to plan shipments from Arizona to
a rth non-t California.
K 6. Click the List Legs tab.
7. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Mode Profile ID field.
 The leg details page allows you to limit the use of this multi-stop itinerary. Most
commonly, you want to limit its use to only those transport modes that can be used for
multi-stop shipments.
 Note the Sequence Number. This indicates in what order a shipment would travel
through multiple legs.
 Note the Primary check box. For multi-leg itineraries, mark the most important leg
as primary.
 Note the Equipment Assignment Type. This controls how OTM makes equipment
assignments for this leg.
 Optimize Equipment allows OTM to choose the appropriate equipment for the leg
of the shipment.
 Re-use Equipment allows OTM to use the same equipment that was selected for
previous leg. You should not select Re-use Equipment for the first leg in an itinerary.
 No Equipment allows OTM to not assign equipment to the shipment.

 In the Compatibility section, note the Mode Profile ID. OTM can only use rates
that match the transport modes in this profile.
 Note the Equipment Group Profile ID. OTM can only use equipment groups
matching the equipment groups in the profile.
Querying for Route and Rate

8. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle toolbar.
There are two options available at the top of the page in the Find drop-down list:
 Rates – When selected, OTM only considers direct rates between the ship from
and ship to locations.
 Rate And Route – When selected, OTM first finds valid itineraries and then looks for
rates that meet the requirements specified on the itinerary.
9. Select a Find option of Rate And Route.
10. Enter a Date Deliver By of today's date plus 3 months.
s a
11. Enter a Ship From Location ID of PHOENIX DC.
) h a
12. Enter a Ship To Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.
om
13. Enter a Transport Mode ID of LTL. c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
14. Click Save to the right of the Transport Mode ID field.
15. u
Select a Flexible Commodity Qualifier of NMFC_CLASS.
16. Enter a Commodity Code of 60.0.
nthim Stud
17.
lika this
Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET.
u
18.
ikฺh use
Enter a Ship Unit Count of 1.
th
19. ar se to
Enter a Weight of 4000 LB.
(k
20.
u tt cen
Enter a Volume of 1 CU FT.
21.
thi ble li
m
Click Save to the right of the Value field.
n
22.
lika sfera
u
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries
Creating a Multi-stop Itinerary
1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary
Manager.
OTM displays the Parameters tab.
3. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA

MULTISTOP.
4. Select the Perspective of Buy.
5. Select the Itinerary Type of Active.
6. Select the Source Geo Hierarchy
of STATE/PROVINCE.
7. Select the Destination Geo s a
Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
8. Mark the Multi-Stop Itinerary check
box. c l
ora uid
tt@ ent G
9. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the
u
page. OTM displays the Lane Definitions tab.
nthim Stud
10. Enter the Source Geography Province Code of
AZ.
ulika this
ikฺh use
11. Enter the Destination Geography Province
th
Code of CA.
(kar se to
tt cen
12. Click List Legs at the bottom of the page.
u
hi ble li
m
OTM displays the List Legs tab.
nt
lika sfera
13. Click New Leg in the middle of the page.
u
H ran
OTM displays the Leg details page.
ik
rth non-t
14. Enter Sequence Number of 1.
K a15. Mark the Primary check box.
16. Select the Equipment Assignment
Type of Optimize Equipment.
17. In the Compatibility section, select the
Mode Profile ID of LAND.
18. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID
of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.
OTM returns to the List Legs tab.
Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries

Solution – Creating Multi-stop Itineraries
You successfully created an itinerary with an ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Multi-stop Itineraries

Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates
Tasks
Querying for Rates

There are two options in the Find drop-down list on the Ask Oracle About Rates page:
 Rates: Used for direct shipments between one pickup and one delivery point.
 Rate and Route: In addition to rate data, this option also uses the itinerary to find
the appropriate rate.
Field Enter This Data…
Find drop-down list Rate and Route
Ship From Location ID PHOENIX DC
Ship To Location ID SAN DIEGO STORE
s a
Transport Mode ID LTL ) h a
om
Click Save
c lecฺ eฺ
Flexible Commodity NMFC_CLASS o ra uid
Qualifier
u tt@ ent G
Commodity Code 60.0
n thim Stud
Transport Handling
u
4X4 PALLET lika this
Unit
th ikฺh use
Ship Unit Count
( k ar1 se to
u tt c4000 e n LB
Weight
im li
Volumenth b le 1 CU FT
a
lik sfer a
HuClick n Save to far right of Commodities grid
ik -tra
a rth nonClick Search at the bottom of the page
K 1. Enter the results of the rate query below (click the + icon for more
details): Field Enter Your Results…
Itinerary ID
Transport Mode
Service Provider ID
Rate Offering
Total Actual Cost
Querying for Rates

Find drop-down list Rate and Route
Ship From Location ID PHOENIX DC

Ship To Location ID SAN DIEGO STORE
Rate Offering ID BTT9 TL
Transport Handling 4X4 PALLET
Unit
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 20000 LB
Volume 2 CU FT
Click Save
Click Search
2. Enter the results of the rate query
below: Field Enter Your Results…
s a
Itinerary ID
) h a
om
Transport Mode
c lecฺ eฺ
Service Provider ID
ora uid
Total Actual Cost
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Querying Route and Rates
You successfully queried the following routes and rates.
Querying for Rate

Itinerary ID AZ-CA MULTISTOP
Transport Mode LTL

Service Provider ID LON9
Rate Offering LON9 LTL
Querying for Rates

s a
Field h a
Enter Your Results…
)
om
ecฺ eฺ
Itinerary ID AZ-CA MULTISTOP
c l
Transport Mode TL
ora uid
Service Provider ID BTT9
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n t hi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Querying Route and Rates

Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases
Creating an Order Base with Line Items
1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base.
2. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1.
4. Click the ID.

5. Click the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE.
 An order configuration determines how ship units are created on order bases
and releases and how calculations are to be performed when an order is being
built.
 Note the Order Base/Release Creation field which indicates whether the order release
will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Line is selected which s a
means this order release will be entered with lines.
) h a
o m
eฺc eฺ
 In addition, this order configuration specifies to automatically create one ship unit
for the line item. This is specified in the Releasing Logic field. c l
ra uidcreate the
Note the Ship Unit Creation field which indicates that OTM willoautomatically

tt@ created
n t G
ship units from the entered line items when the order release
u
im tud e (saved for the
first time).
th
6. Close the Order Configuration manager.
lik a hi s S
n
7. Click the Line Item tab.
ik ฺhu use t
8. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the
a rthright of tthe
o Packaged Item ID of CRACKERS.
 Note the Packaged Item (kID andnItem
tt ID, e ID fields. One of these fields must be specified.
sassign
im u
If you specify an item
li
anc e
auto rule should be configured to automatically set
n
the packaged
a th item bID.le
 Note
u likthe Total
fe ra Count. Specify the packaged item you want to ship and the
Package
Hnumber aof s
ncan
those packaged items. Depending on how you defined your packaged
ik t r
a rth  noNote
n- the Source
item, you override the values for packaging unit and transport handling unit.
K Location ID and Destination Location ID fields. Each line item within
the order base can have its own set of source and destination locations.
 Note the Shippable check box. When this check box is marked, OTM releases the
full amount in this line item.
 Note the Net Weight and Net Volume fields. Any values you enter here override the
weights and volumes defined on the packaged item.
 Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is
important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit
time.
 Note the Released Weight, Released Volume, Released Count, and Quantity
Remaining fields. OTM displays how much of your order base line item has
already been released. You can see the same information, just below, in the
Release Instruction section.
9. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the existing release instruction.
 Note the Release Instruction drop-down list. You can release by item count, weight, or
volume.

 Note the Allow Releasing check box. Mark Allow Releasing for OTM to release
according to your instructions; alternatively, OTM saves your release instruction without
releasing.
 You can also modify the source and destination locations as well as change pickup and
delivery dates.
10. Click Save at the bottom of the release instruction page.
11. Click Save at the bottom of the line item page.

You can ensure OTM builds shipments a certain way based on the constraints you define.
You can enter information specific to itineraries, rates, equipment, and service provider.
13. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page.
You can specify a link between this order and other orders within OTM.
14. Click the Involved Parties tab.
At a minimum, you must enter an involved party or contact with an involved party
s a
qualifier ID of LOGISTICS for OTM to be able to send a tender notification.
) h a
15. Click the Other Attributes tab. om
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
Note the Accessorial and Special Service fields. You can specify additional services
required for this order. o
16. Click the Remarks tab.
u tt@ ent G
thim Stud
Use this tab to specify text templates or remarks. Remarks allow you to log any
n
u lika this
extra information you may want to keep with the order base.
Updating Pickup and Delivery Datesh i ฺh Order

kthe u e
sReleases
t on
ar later into
tt (k
To complete the guided demonstrations
n s e this scenario, you need to set the Early Pickup
im u lice
Dates and Late Delivery Dates on all three MULTISTOP order releases to current dates. To do
n th ble> Order Release > Order Release.

this, complete the following:
17. Click OrderaManagement
18. Enteru feraID of MULTISTOP.
likOrdersBase
ik H Search
an
ranat the bottom of the page.
th - t
r nonthe check boxes for all three order releases: MULTISTOP1-001, MULTISTOP2-
19. Click
Ka 20. Select
001
and MULTISTOP3-001.
22. On Order Release ID MULTISTOP1-001, enter an Early Pickup Date of today and a Late
Delivery Date of three months from today.
23. Click Next at the top of the page.
27. Click Finished at the top of the page to save the changes.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items
In addition to releasing from within the order base line item page, you can use an order
base line action to release line items.
Releasing an Order Base with Line Items

1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base Line.
To work with order bases defined with ship units, you can use Order Management >
Purchase Order > Order Base Ship Unit.

2. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1.
OTM displays the Order Lines results page.
5. Click Actions at the top of the page.
s a
) h a
Note the actions Release Remaining Order Amount and Release Total Order Amount.
These actions quickly release all unreleased line item quantities or all line items in the
om
ecฺ eฺ
order base.
c l
ra uid
6. Click Order Management > Change Order > Release Lines.
o
tt@ ent G
You can manually release all or part of your order base lines. In this example, all originally
u
ordered crackers have already been released.
7. Close the Order Base Line page.
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items

Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items
Creating the First Order Base with Line Items
1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base.
OTM displays the Order Base tab.
3. Enter an Order Base ID of

MULTISTOP1.
4. Select an Order Configuration of
ONE_TO_ONE.
5. Select a Reference Number
Qualifier of PO.
6. Enter a Reference Number of
54321.
s a
7. Click Save to the right of the
) h a
Reference Number field. om
8. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
9. Click New Line Item. u
nthim Stud
CRACKERS (previously created).
ulika this
ikฺh use
th
(kar se to
12. Enter a Source Location ID of
tt cen
PHOENIX DC (previously created).
u
hi ble li
m
13. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN
nt
lika sfera
DIEGO STORE (previously created).
u
14. Mark the Shippable check box.
H ran
ik
rth non-t
15. Enter a Net Weight of 26700 LB.
K a16. Enter a Net Volume of 400 CU FT.

17. Select an Early Pickup Date of today’s
date.
18. Select a Late Delivery Date of today’s
date plus 3 months.
Note: Since there are a number of fields on the order base, make sure you populate
the correct fields.
19. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET.
22. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the
page. OTM displays the Order Base Links tab.
OTM displays the Involved Parties tab.
24. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX
DC PLANNER (previously created).
25. Select the Communication Method of BY
CONTACT.
26. Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of
LOGISTICS.
32. Select a Reference Number Qualifier of PO.
33. Enter a Reference Number of 54322.
34. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field.
36. Click New Line Item.

CHOCOLATE COOKIES (previously
created).
39. Enter a Source Location ID of
PHOENIX DC (previously created).
s a
40. Enter a Destination Location ID of LOS
ANGELES STORE (previously created). ) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
43. Enter a Net Volume of 200 CU FT.
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
44. Select an Early Pickup Date of today’s
date.
nt
45.
ulika this
Select a Late Delivery Date of today’s
date plus 3 months.
thikฺh use
k ar se to
(
tt cen
the correct fields.
u
46.
h im li
Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET.
t le
47.
k n
a erab
Click Save at the bottom of the page.
li
u nsf
48.
H
Click Constraints at the bottom of the page.
ik n-tra
r th OTM displays the Constraints tab.
Ka 49. noClick Order Base Links at the bottom of the
51. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX
52. Select the Communication Method of BY
CONTACT.
LOGISTICS.
54. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party
Contact field.
Creating the Third Order Base with

Line Items
56. Click Create Another. (Order
Practice 1 - Creating Order
Management Bases with
> Purchase Line Items
Order >
Order Base) Chapter 1 - Page 213
MULTISTOP3.
64. Enter a Packaged Item ID of MOTOR OIL (previously created).
66. Enter a Source Location ID of PHOENIX DC (previously created).
67. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE (previously created).
70. Enter a Net Volume of 200 CU FT.

71. Select an Early Pickup Date of today’s date.
72. Select a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months.
the correct fields.
73. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET.
s a
) h a
om
76. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
77.
u
Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the tt@ ent G
thim tud
78.
ik a hi s S
n
Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX
l
h
ฺ u se t
k
79.
r i
th to u
Select the Communication Method of BY
a
tt (k cense
CONTACT.
u
him ble li
n
LOGISTICS.t
81. lika sfera
Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party
u
ik H ran
Contact field.
a th on-t
r82. Click Finished at the top of the page.
K n

Solution – Creating Order Bases with Line Items
Creating an Order Base with Line Items
You successfully created an order base with an ID of MULTISTOP1.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating Order Bases with Line Items

Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases

Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases
Bulk Planning Order Releases
2. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP.

4. Mark the check box in the header to select the three order releases.
5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan – Buy.
6. Select the Parameter Set ID of RATE PREF ON.
7. Note the What-If Scenario check box (do not select it). If selected, OTM only runs a
test bulk plan and does not build any shipments. This can be used for testing.
Note: For this demonstration, do not select the What-If Scenario check box!
s a
8. Click OK at the bottom of the page.
) h a
9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page to see if the bulk plan has finished running.
o m
 When you see an end time, OTM has finished running the bulk plan.
c lecฺ eฺ
10. Note the Bulk Plan ID.
o ra uid

u tt@ ent G
When you perform a bulk plan, a unique bulk plan ID is created for the bulk plan. This
n thim Stud
bulk plan ID allows you to view the bulk plan at any time via the Operational Planning
ika this
> Planning Results > Shipment Planning menu option.
11. Click the Parameter Set ID. u l
ฺh wasuused

th ikthat se to process this bulk plan.
k r eprocesses
This shows the set of parameters
avarious to behave within OTM.
Parameters determine how
(
tt atcthe
12. Click the Collapse Allubutton
s
nbottom.
m li e

n t
Note how manyhi different
b le sections there are.
13. Click the a
lik sfer
plus sign a
(+) next to Bulk Plan.
u
 HThese a n
th ik - tr parameters are specific to bulk planning.
a r non
14. Scroll down and click the plus sign (+) next to Multistop.
K  These parameters are specific to mutlistop scenarios.
15. Note the second parameter Multistop Config ID.
16. Click the link for Multistop Default in the Default Value column.
 The Logic Configuration page for a type of Multistop opens. These are additional
parameters for multi-stop shipment planning.
 Logic configuration is a collection of related parameters and algorithms used by OTM.
A configuration can handle different scenarios and be shared by different parameter
sets.
17. Click the Help link in the upper right-hand corner of the page.
 This topic shows the navigation from the menu. You don’t have to start at the Bulk Plan
results page. You could also view logic configuration by going to Shipment
Management > Power Data > General > Logic Configuration.
 Note the different logic configuration types such as container optimization,
driver configuration and network routing.
 Click on any of these help links to view more about that logic configuration type and
its associated parameters.

18. Click the Multistop help link.
You see more information about each multi-stop logic configuration parameter.
19. Close the Help topic.
20. Close the Logic Configuration page.
21. On the Bulk Plan page, note the Results tab. The Results tab of the Bulk Plan
Manager allows you to view informational attributes about the bulk plan results such as:
 Start and end time of the bulk planning process

 Number of orders selected for bulk planning
 Number of orders that were planned onto shipments
 Number of orders that were unassigned and re-planned for better shipping
opportunities
 Number of order movements created, planned and failed.
 Number of shipments created
s a
 Number of orders that failed to plan
) h a
 Totals for costs, weight, volume, and distance.
om
22. Click the Metrics tab.
c lecฺ eฺ
o ra uid
 The Metrics tab has several sections:
tt@derived
n t G the total
 The Bulk Plan Level Metrics section summarizes metrics u
im tude
from
bulk plan.
th Sfor shipments based on
 The Mode Metrics section displays summary
lik an statistics
h i s
h
ฺ u son e at separate row with summary
transportation mode. Each mode
i k
th to u
appears
values.
a r
(kMetricsEach
ttprovider.
 The Service Provider
n e displays summary statistics for shipments
ssection
u
based on service
im li c e service provider appears on a separate row with
23. Click theik a nth rabtab.le

summary values.
ul Performance
fe tab contains bulk plan level metrics and milestone metrics.
Performance
 HThe n s
r th ik For
n - tra details on the expanded Bulk Plan Manager, see the OTM 5.5 CU4: OTM
Ka noBulk Plan Functional Overview Transfer of Information (TOI) session.
more
24. Close the Bulk Plan Manager page.
Mapping Shipments
27. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP.
29. Mark the check box in the header to select the both shipments.
30. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments.
OTM displays the map with your shipments on it.
31. Click the plus sign (+) button in the left-hand corner to zoom in.
OTM displays the map with all of your shipments.
 Note how your multi-stop shipment is one shipment with many stops and not an
individual shipment between each location.

32. Close the map page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases
1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order
Release. OTM displays the order release finder page.
2. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTI.

4. Mark the check boxes next to your three Order Releases.
5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan -
Buy. OTM displays the Shipment Planning page.
6. Select the Parameter Set ID of RATE PREF ON.
7. Click OK.
s a
OTM displays the Bulk Plan page.
) h a
8. Wait a few seconds for the bulk plan process to finish.
om
9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page.
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
When you see a Status of COMPLETED and an end time, OTM has finished running
the bulk plan.
u tt@ ent G
10.
him Stud
Verify that all three orders were planned into shipments. Note the Orders Planned field and
n t
ika this
make sure this has 3 listed.
u l
kฺh use
11. Click Actions > View > Shipments.
thi
ar se to
OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page with your shipments listed.
12. (k
tt cen
Select the check boxes next to all shipments.
u
hi ble li
m
14. nt
Answer the following. View the shipments to find all information.
u lika sField
fera Enter Your Results…
H ra n
ik nTL-tShipment
a r th o
ID
K n Transport Mode ID TL
Total Actual Cost
(expand the More
section)
Total Weighted Cost
Service Provider ID

LTL Shipment ID
Transport Mode ID LTL
Total Actual Cost
(expand the More
section)

Service Provider ID
15. Close the Buy Shipment View page.

16. Close the Bulk Plan Manager page.
Mapping Your Shipments

17. On the Order Release results page, ensure the check boxes next to all order releases
you used during this bulk plan are selected.
18. Click Actions > Order Management > Map > Map Related
Shipments. OTM displays the map with all of your shipments.
19. Click the plus sign (+) button in the left-hand corner to zoom in.
OTM displays the map with all of your shipments.
Note how your multi-stop shipment is one shipment with many stops and not an individual
s a
shipment between each location.
) h a
20. Close the map shipment page.
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Bulk Planning Order Releases
Bulk Planning your Order Releases
OTM should have created 2 shipments during the bulk plan process.
TL Shipment ID nnnnn
Transport Mode ID TL
Total Weighted Cost 455.00 USD
Service Provider ID BTT9
s a
Field
a
) h
LTL Shipment ID nnnnn
om
Transport Mode ID LTL c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
Service Provider ID LON9
nthim Stud
ulika this
th ikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Bulk Planning Order Releases

Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops

Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops
Re-sequencing Stops
2. Click the Transport tab.
3. Enter a Mode of TL.
4. Click the Advanced tab.

7. Mark the check box next to the shipment. If there is more than one shipment, click the
ID of the shipment with the highest sequential number.
s a
OTM displays the Shipment View page.
) h a
9. Scroll to the bottom of the page.
om
lecฺ eฺ
Note the location with a stop number of 3. It should be LOS ANGELES STORE
c
LOS ANGELES CA 90043.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
10. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Shipment Stops > Resequence
u
him Stud
Stops.
nt
11. Click the option button next to stop number 3.
12. Click Move Up.
ulika this
13. Click Ok.
thikฺh use
(kar se to
14. From the Resequence Stops page under the Affected Shipment header, click the ID for the
shipment. u tt cen
thi ble li
m
15. Scroll to Shipment Stops section at the bottom of the page.
n
lika sfera
Note the location with a stop number of 3. It should now be SAN DIEGO STORE
u
ik H ran
SAN DIEGO CA 92101.
a rth non-t
K 17. Close the Resequence Stops page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops

Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops
Re-sequencing Stops
Original Planned Shipment
Phoenix DC San Diego Los Angeles

General Store General Store
Shipment after Re-sequenced Stops
Phoenix DC Los Angeles San Diego

s a
) h a
In this practice, you have been notified that the Los Angeles store has dipped into their
m
safety stock of chocolate cookies, and they need their delivery as soon as possible to
o
c lecฺ eฺ
replenish their inventory. You need to re-sequence the stops so that the Los Angeles store
is the first destination stop.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
u
him Stud
OTM displays the Shipment tab of the buy shipment search page.
2. Click the Transport tab.
nt
ul
OTM displays the Transport tab.ika this
3. Enter a Mode of TL.
thikฺh use
4.
kar se to
Click the Advanced tab.
(
u tt cen
OTM displays the Advanced tab.
5. thi ble li
m
Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.
n
6.
lika sfera
u
k H ran
i
a r7.th non-t
Mark the check box next to the shipment.
K 8. Click View at the top of the page.
9. Scroll to the bottom of the page to view the shipment stops.
How many stops are on
this shipment?
What location is
currently stop 3?
10. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Shipment Stops > Resequence
Stops.
OTM displays the Resequence Stops page in a new window.
11. Click the option button next to Stop Number 3, LOS ANGELES STORE.
12. Click Move Up.

Note that the Los Angeles Store has been moved up to stop number
2.
13. Click OK.
OTM displays the Shipment – Resequence page.
14. Click the shipment ID under Affected Shipments.
OTM displays the Shipment View page in a new
window.

15. Scroll to the bottom of the Buy Shipment view
page. What location is
currently stop 3?
16. Close the Shipment View page.

17. Close the Shipment – Resequence Stops page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Re-sequencing Stops
Re-sequencing Stops
You successfully re-sequenced the stops so the shipment is now:
Phoenix DC Los Angeles San Diego


How many stops are on 3
this shipment?
What location is Los Angeles Store
currently stop 3?
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
What location is San Diego Store
ora uid
currently stop 3?
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
u lika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Re-sequencing Stops

Tendering Shipments
OTM displays the Shipment tab of the buy shipments search page.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
OTM displays the Advanced tab.

5. Mark the check box next to each of the shipments.
6. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Secure Resources.
OTM displays the Secure Resources confirmation page.
s a
h a
OTM tenders the shipments to the service provider assigned to each
)
shipment.
om
7. Close the Secure Resources confirmation page.
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Log out of OTM.
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

You successfully tendered your TL and LTL shipments to their respective service providers.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider
Declining a Tender as the Service Provider
In this practice, you will log into OTM as the BTT9 service provider. BTT9 cannot handle this
shipment and will decline the tender. OTM then re-tenders to the next best service provider.
1. Log in to OTM as SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-BTT9 using password CHANGEME. (For
example, SERVPROV.CORE102-BTT9.)
2. Click Online Booking/Tendering.

OTM displays the tender response search page.
OTM displays the Online Booking/Tendering results page.
4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Online Booking/Tendering page.
s a
5. Write down the following information.
) h a
om
Tender Offer Status
c lecฺ eฺ
o ra uid
Respond By
u tt@ nt G
Tender Acceptance
th im tude
an his S
Status
lik
6. Click Decline at the bottom of the h ik ฺhu use t
k rt e page.
page.
aShipment to
(
OTM displays the Decline This
ttCodecofeCPU s
n or any other code you prefer.
7. Enter a Decline Reason
m u li
8. Click Finished nthithe bottom
at
b le of the page.
a r a
ulik service
OTM automatically
firstHchoice ofn sfere-tenders the shipment to another service provider after your
th a
ikLog outn-oftrOTM. provider declined.
r no
Ka
9.
Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider

Solution – Declining Tender as Service Provider
Declining a Tender as the Service Provider
You successfully logged into OTM as the BTT9 service provider and declined the tender.

Tender Offer Status OUTSTANDING

Respond By +2H from tender sent
Tender Acceptance NO RESPONSE
Status
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Declining Tender as Service Provider

Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner
Viewing a Message in the OTM Message Center
1. Log in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. (For example, CORE101.ADMIN.)
2. Click Message Center at the top of the page.
OTM displays the Messages search page.

OTM displays the Messages results page.
4. Look for a Message Title saying that the
Tender for Shipment BTT9-#####
DECLINED.
5. Click the ID to view the message.
OTM displays the message.
s a
6. Scroll down to view more of the
message. ) h a
om
Viewing the Status of Shipments
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
OTM displays the buy shipment search page. u
8. Click the Order Base tab.
nthim Stud
OTM displays the Order Base tab.
u lika this
9. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTI. kฺh se
th i u
10. Click l (list) next to Order Base
(k arID. se to
OTM displays the OrdertBases
u t results e n page.
h im next c
li the three order bases you just created.
n t
11. Mark the check boxes
le to
lik
12. Click Finish aat theetop
f r aofbthe page.
ik Hureturns
OTM
ra
tosthe Order Base tab.
n
a th InOrder
r13. n -t
the drop-down
o
list to the right of
K n Base ID, select
Operator of One Of.
a Conditional
14. Click Search at the bottom of the

page.
OTM displays the Buy Shipments
results page.
15. Click the ID of the shipment with a mode of TL (this is the shipment that BTT9
declined). OTM displays the Identification tab.
 Fieldtype of SECURE RESOURCES.
Note the status Enter Your Results…
 The Status Value
Shipment ID should still be SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED since OTM
automatically re-tendered the shipment to another service provider when the
Service
tender wasProvider
declined.
(Identification tab)
Reference
18. Note the following:Number

(Qualifier=BM)
Total Actual Cost
(Financials tab)
Planned Cost
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner
Viewing the Status of Shipments
You successfully viewed the status of your shipments.
Shipment ID Nnnnn
Service Provider ATL9

Reference Number ATL9-nnnnnn
(Qualifier=BM)
(Financials tab)
Planned Cost 705.00 USD
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner

Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status
Accepting Tenders as the Transport Planner
1. From the Shipment edit page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Accept
Tender.
OTM displays the Accept This Shipment page.
2. Note the Pickup Date Time.

3. Click Finished at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays a confirmation page.
4. Close the Accept Tender page.
Viewing the Status of Shipments as the

Transport Planner
5. Click Shipment Management >
s a
Shipment Management > Buy
) h a
Shipments.
om
6. Click the Order Base tab. c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
MULTISTOP1.
u
thim Stud
n
lika this
Note the color of the indicator next to the TL shipment. It should now be green, since
u
thikฺh use
the tender has been accepted. This indicator was set by the automation agent
ar se to
previously created.
(k
tt cen
9. Look for the Status column and note the status is now set to
u
SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED.
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status

Solution – Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status
Accepting Tenders as the Transport Planner
As the transport planner, you successfully accepted the shipment tender.
Viewing the Status of Shipments as the Transport Planner

You noted the indicator color is set to green and viewed the shipment status of SECURE
RESOURCES_ACCEPTED.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status

Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment

Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations
Viewing a Public Location
1. Click on Shipment Management > Location Manager.
2. Enter a Location Name of BREMERHAVEN.
3. Select the conditional operator of Contains.

6. Click the ID of DEBRV.
When you view the details or try to edit a public location, the view page is displayed.
This page cannot be edited, only viewed.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations

Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations
Viewing a Shared Location
Let’s check that you can access the location which is in a domain called SHAREDCORE to
which you have read only access.
What is the fixed stop time of

the location WARSAW
PLANT?
(Hint: Search for a Location ID
of WARSAW PLANT)
Querying for Public Locations s a

Next, let’s look for some information on locations located in the PUBLIC domain. ) h a
o m
1. Click on Shipment Management > Location Manager.
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM displays the location search page.
o ra uid
2. Enter a Location Name of BREMERHAVEN.
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
4. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC. n t
a hi s
5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. ulik
ik ฺh use t
OTM displays the Locations resultshpage.
art sIfeyou
You will be using the DEBRVklocation.
( toare unable to find this location, please notify
your trainer. utt cen
t im
hLocations
le li
Querying for Public
k n
a Fielderab
li
u nsf Enter This Data…
H
ikLocation a
r th n - trName HOUSTON
K a no
Conditional Operator Contains
Domain Name PUBLIC
You will be using the USHOU location. If you are unable to find this location, please notify
your trainer.
Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations

Solution – Viewing Public Locations
Viewing a Location
You successfully determined the fixed stop time.
What is the fixed stop time of 1H
the location WARSAW

PLANT?
You successfully viewed both the PUBLIC DEBRV and USHOU locations.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Public Locations

Lesson 38: Viewing Items
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 38: Viewing Items

Practice 1 - Viewing Items
Querying for Shared Items
1. Click on Order Management > Material Management >
Item. OTM displays the Items search page.
2. Enter an Item ID of T SHIRTS.

OTM displays the Items results page.
You will be using the T SHIRTS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your
trainer.
5. Click New Query.
OTM displays the Items search page.
s a
6. Enter an Item ID of SHORTS.
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
You will be using the SHORTS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your
u
trainer.
nthim Stud
ika this
9. Click New Query.
ul
kฺh use
OTM displays the Items search page.
thi
ar se to
10. Enter an Item ID of SOCKS.
(k
tt cen
u
hi ble li
m
nt
u lika sfera
You will be using the SOCKS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your
ik H ran
trainer.
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Viewing Items

Solution – Viewing Items
Viewing Items
You successfully viewed the T SHIRTS, SHORTS, and SOCKS items located in the
SHAREDCORE domain.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Items

Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles
for Ocean
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean
Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles
for Ocean
Verifying Equipment Group and Equipment Group Profile

What is the effective weight

40FT OCEAN CONTAINER?
(Hint: Go to Shipment
Management > Equipment
Group.)
s a
What equipment groups are
part of the Equipment Group ) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
Profile 40 OCEAN
COMPATIBLE? c l
ora uid
(Hint: Go to Shipment
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
nt
Group Profile.)
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean
Solution – Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles
for Ocean
Verifying Equipment Group and Equipment Group Profile
You successfully verified the following equipment:
What is the effective weight 44000.00 LB

40FT OCEAN CONTAINER?
What equipment groups are 40FT OCEAN CONTAINER
part of the Equipment Group
Profile 40 OCEAN
COMPATIBLE?
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean
Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for
Truckload Leg One
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for
Truckload Leg One
Verifying Service Provider and Rates

What is the Corporation ID for

the service provider BIS9?
(Go to Contract and Rate
Management > Service
Provider Manager. Then
search for BIS9 to view it.)
What is the response time

when tendering to BIS9?
s a
(Go to Business Process
) h a
Automation > Communication
om
Management > Contacts.
c lecฺ eฺ
Then search on the BIS9
ora uid
tt@ ent G
contact and view it.)
u
In what currency is the BIS9
nthim Stud
ika this
TL Rate Offering defined?
ul
kฺh use
(View the rate offering to
determine the currency)
thi
(kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One
Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for
Truckload Leg One
What is the Corporation ID for BISON TRUCK COMPANY
BIS9?
What is the response time 2 H (hours)
when tendering to BIS9?
In what currency is the BIS9 EUR
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One
Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for
Vessel
Viewing a Vessel Rate Offering
Vessel rate offerings and rate records are set up similarly to other modes.
One difference on the rate offering is the rate service or how transit time is calculated. Vessel
rates use voyage schedules that you define in OTM.
2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of ACLU VESSEL.
4. Click the ID.
The following information was entered when the rate offering was created:
s a
 Note the Offering Type of VESSEL
) h a
 Note the Transport Mode of VESSEL-CO
om
5. Click v (view) next to the Rate Service ID.
c lecฺ eฺ
 ora uid
Note the Rate Service Type. In the rate service, you refer to a rate service type which
tt@ ent G
in this example is VOYAGESCHEDULE. Your voyage schedules also refer to this rate
u
him Stud
service type linking your voyage schedules to your rate service.
nt
ika this
 Note the Voyage Service Type ID. In the rate service, you also define the associated
ul
voyage service type which in this example is TAS-2. This voyage service type links to
ikฺh use
the voyage schedule in the Voyage Manager.
th
kar se to
6. Close the Rate Service page.
(
u tt cen
7. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Voyage.
thi ble li
m
8. Enter a Voyage Service Type ID of TAS-2.
n
lika sfera
u
ik H ran
OTM displays the Voyages results page.
a rth non-t
Note the Voyage Service Type ID which links this schedule to any rate service that also
K uses this voyage service type ID.
10. Click on any of the IDs.
 Note the Vessel ID. You can associate a specific vessel to this voyage, for example,
vessel ID of SS FREIGHTER.
 The voyage defines the origin(s) and destination(s) for the TAS-2 service type. In this
example, the location of DEBRV (Bremerhaven) has an activity of Depart which
makes it the origin. The location of USHOU (Houston) has an activity of Arrive which
makes it the destination.
 Note the Activity Date for each location. The activity date specifies when the vessel will
arrive or depart at the location that you specified. OTM evaluates this date during
shipment planning to determine whether a voyage schedule can be used to build a
shipment. When a shipment is created, the activity date determines the shipment stop
dates/times.
 You can define cutoff and recovery times (load and unload times) for the ocean move
in Shipment Management > Power Data > Location > Cutoff Recovery Times.
 Deliveries need to be brought to the origin port a certain amount of time prior to
a voyage. This is known as cutoff time.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel
 If the delivery does not arrive at the port before the cutoff time, it cannot
be accepted on the ship.
 There is a certain amount of time that the delivery must wait at the destination
before it is ready. This is known as the recovery time.
Viewing a Vessel Rate Record

One way vessel carriers quote their rates is per container. No matter how the rates are
quoted, they are defined on the rate record.

12. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU DEU-USA.
OTM displays the Rate Records results page.
14. Click the ID.
15. Click the Rate Costs tab.
s a
16. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Description field.
) h a
o m
eฺc eฺ
 This example shows a rate cost based on shipment total pieces of equipment as
the basis with a unit of 1.
c l
o rofa equipment
u id of 1.
 So the actual rate cost is 545.00 USD per shipment total pieces
tt@ ent G
u
n thim Stud
ulika this
th ikฺh use
( k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel
Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel
Verifying the Service Provider
The service provider Atlantic Commerce Line Unlimited is public data. Query on the
public service provider ACLU.
2. Enter a Service Provider ID of ACLU.

You will be using the ACLU service provider. If you are unable to find this service provider,
please notify your trainer.
Creating a Vessel Rate Offering

Next, create a vessel rate offering with the following information:
s a
) h a
5. Click New at the bottom of the page. om
OTM displays the Rate Header tab. c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
tt@ ent G
6. Enter an Offering ID of ACLU
VESSEL. u
7. Select an Offering Type of
nthim Stud
VESSEL.
ulika this
thikฺh use
ar se to
ACLU.
(k
tt cen
As soon as you click anywhere else
u
hi ble li
m
on the page, the page refreshes.
nt
9. Click n (new) next to the Rate Service ID.
u lika sfera
OTM displays the Rate Service Header tab.
ik H ran
rth non-t
10. Enter a Rate Service ID of VOYAGE
K a SERVICE.
11. Select a Rate Service Type of
VOYAGESCHEDULE.
12. Click Details at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Rate Service Details tab.
13. Enter a Voyage Service Type ID of TAS-
2.
14. Click Save to the right of the Voyage
Service Type ID field.
OTM returns to the Rate Header tab.
16. Select a Transport Mode of
VESSEL-CO.
18. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018.
Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel
Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel
You successfully created a vessel rate offering with an ID of ACLU VESSEL and a rate service
with an ID of VOYAGE SERVICE.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel
Creating a Vessel Rate Record
Create a vessel rate record with the following information. This rate is 545.00 USD per
container.
1. From the confirmation page that you saw in practice 1, mark the check box next to the
rate offering you just created.
2. Click Actions > Contract and Rate > Change Rates > Create Rate Record.
OTM displays the Lane Info tab and populates the Rate Offering ID field.
4. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of LOCATION.
5. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of LOCATION.
s a
7. Enter a Source Geography Location ID ) h a
om
of DEBRV.
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Enter a Destination Geography
ora uid
tt@ ent G
Location ID of USHOU.
u
him Stud
nt
ulika this
10. Click Add A Cost near the bottom of the page.
hikฺh use
t
kar se to
11. Make sure that a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
(
u tt cen
Charge should be the default cost type.
thi ble li
m
n
lika sfera
13. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment
u
ik H ran
Total Pieces of Equipment.
a rth non-t
14. Enter a Unit of 1.
K 15. Click Save at the bottom of the page.
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel

Solution – Creating a Rate Record for Vessel
You successfully created a rate record with an ID of ACLU DEU-USA.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Creating a Rate Record for Vessel

Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services

Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services
Accessorials and special services can be requested on the location, order base, order
release, and item.
They can also be requested on asset management objects like driver, power unit, etc. Refer
to the online help for using accessorials with asset management or Fleet Management.
Viewing on a Location
First, let’s look at requesting accessorials and special services on a location.

4. Click the ID.
s a
At the bottom of the Roles tab, you can ) h a
om
define accessorials and/or special
c lecฺ eฺ
services.
o ra uid
Viewing on an Order Base
u tt@ ent G
Next, let’s look at requesting accessorials and
n thim Stud
special services on an order base.
6. Click Order Management > Purchase ฺhul
ika this
th ik u se
Order > Order Base.
7. Enter an Order Base ID of (ka
r e to
u tt cens
im leoflithe page.
MULTISTOP1.
8. Click Search atth
k n abBases results page.
the bottom
a the eOrder
r
li f
Huthe ID.
OTM displays
a n s
ik
9. Click
th Clickothe r
-tOther Attributes tab.
a r10. n
K Atnthe bottom of the Other Attributes tab, you can define accessorials and/or
special services.
Viewing on an Order Release

Next, let’s look at requesting accessorials and special services on an order release.
12. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP1.
14. Click the ID.
15. Click the Other Attributes tab.
 At the bottom of the Other Attributes tab, you can define accessorials and/or
special services.
 You can specify a special service group, duration, and source/destination location.
These fields are reviewed in more detail in Guided Demonstration 3: Defining Special
Services.
Viewing on an Item
Finally, let’s look at requesting accessorials and special services on an item.
17. Enter an Item ID of CRACKERS.
19. Click the ID.
20. Click the Accessorials tab.
On the Accessorials tab, you can
define accessorials and/or special
services.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials
You can define accessorial costs on the rate offering or rate record. Here, you view the terminal
handling accessorial charge on the rate record.
Viewing the Accessorial Code


4. Click the ID.
On the Accessorials tab, you define both accessorial codes and accessorial costs.
6. Click the Accessorial Code ID of TERM HNDLG.
s a
OTM displays the Accessorial Code view page.
) h a
om
ฺc theฺ
 Note the Accessorial Code ID. When defining an accessorial, you first
c ledefine
accessorial code.
o ra uide
 Note the Flow Thru check box. If you mark the Flow Thrut@
t checkebox
n G a buy
t and
shipment uses this accessorial, OTM also passes m on u
tud cost applies
hi theSaccessorial
the accessorial to the sell
n t
shipment to impact customer billing. In this instance,
l
to both the payment invoice and the customer
u ika bill.thThis
is way, you can pass on an
ik ฺh use additional fee.
accessorial charge to a customer without adding an
 Note the Always Apply check h
artbox. to markyouthehaving
If you Always Apply check box, OTM
( k
tt order
always applies the accessorial
n
codee
s or location.
without to request the accessorial code
on an item, order u e
Note then t m lecheck
base,
hiExempt lic box. Mark the VAT Exempt check box if the accessorial is
release,

k a erab
VAT
taxliexempt.
H uFinishednsatfthe top of the page.
8. Click
th a
ikClosenthe-trconfirmation
a r9.
no page.
K
Viewing the Accessorial Cost
Next, you define the cost associated with the terminal handling charge accessorial. There are
several constraints you can assign to the accessorial cost including effective dates and
calendars. The terminal handling charge in this example is 120.00 USD per piece of equipment.
10. Click the Accessorial Cost ID of TH.
OTM displays the Accessorial Cost view page.
The Accessorial Cost page is very similar to the Rate Cost page. In this example,
the following information is entered in the Accessorial Cost page:
 Accessorial Cost ID of TH.
 Cost Type of Charge is specified.
 Amount of 120.00 USD.
 Basis of Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment.
 Unit of 1.

This example shows an additional cost of 120.00 USD per piece of equipment.
12. Close the Accessorial Cost page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services
Now that you have learned about defining accessorials, let’s look at defining special services.
In this example, assign the special service to a rate record.
Viewing the Special Services Code

2. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU.

4. Click the ID of ACLU DEU-USA.
5. Click the Special Services tab.
If there is a cost associated with your special service, you define an accessorial code
and an accessorial cost for that special service.
s a
6. Click New Special Service.
) h a
OTM displays the Rate Record / Special Service Edit page.
o m
7. Click n (new) next to Special Service.
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM displays the Special Service page in a new window.
o ra uid
tt@ n t G
 Note the Special Service ID. If the service provider offers
u this special
e
service as part
of the base charge, you only need a special service
n thim service
ID.
S tuddescription, it
 Note the Special Service Desc. If you record
l a histab of the Shipment Manager
a special
ikFinancials
appears as the shipment cost type onuthe
ฺhto a shipment.
e t
ik u s
rthSelecte the
when this special service is applied
Note the Arbitrary checkkbox.a toArbitrary

( annsocean arbitrary. check box to indicate that the
special service is fortttracking
im u contains
li c e many fields used with Oracle Fleet Management. This
The Special Service
n h ble class does not include details on the Oracle Fleet
tCompetence
page
a
lik module.
OTM 6.3 Core
eraPlease refer to the see the Oracle Transportation Management 6.0
u
Management s
H ofraInformation
n f
th ikTransfer
- t Functional Overview - Special Services and Remarks .and the OTM
a r non online help for details about these sections of the page.
K 8. Close the Special Service page.
Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services

Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record
Defining an Accessorial on a Rate Record
Define a 120.00 USD terminal handling accessorial charge per container on the vessel rate
record that you created previously.

4. Click the ID.
6. Click n (new) next to Accessorial Code ID.
s a
OTM displays the Accessorial Code page.
) h a
7. Enter an Accessorial Code ID of TERM
om
HNDLG.
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Enter an Accessorial Code Description of
ora uid
TERM HANDLING.
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
9. Mark the Always Apply check box.
nt
ika this
10. Click Finished at the top of the Accessorial
Code page.
ul
hikฺh use
OTM returns to the Accessorials tab and adds the new accessorial to the Accessorial
t
Code ID field.
(kar se to
u tt cen
11. Click n (new) next to Accessorial Cost ID.
thi ble li
m
OTM displays the Accessorial Cost page.
n
lika sfera
12. Enter an Accessorial Cost ID of TH.
u
ik H ran
13. Make sure a Cost Type of Charge is
a rth non-t
selected.
K 14. Enter an Amount of 120.00 USD.
Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment.
16. Enter a Unit of 1.
Accessorial Cost page.
OTM returns to the Accessorials tab and adds the new accessorial to the Accessorial
Cost ID field.
18. Click Save to the right of the Accessorial Cost ID field.
OTM displays a message regarding sharing accessorial costs across rates.
19. Click OK.
Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record

Solution – Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record
You successfully defined an accessorial on the ACLU DEU-USA rate record.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record

Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final
Truckload Leg
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the
Final Truckload Leg

What is the response time
when tendering to COY9?

(Go to Business Process
Automation > Communication
Management > Contacts.
Then search on the COY9
contact and view it.)
In what currency is the COY9
s a
) h a
(View the rate offering to
om
determine the currency)
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload
Leg
Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the
Final Truckload Leg
What is the response time 2 H (hours)
when tendering to COY9?
In what currency is the COY9 USD

s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload
Leg
Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates
Running a Truckload Rate Query
Find Rates
Date Deliver By Today's date plus 3 months
Ship From Location ID WARSAW PLANT

Ship to Location ID DEBRV
Transport Handling Unit LARGE BOX
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 15000 KG
s a
Volume 1 CU FT
) h a
Click Save to the right of the Commodities grid.
om
Click Search c leฺc eฺ
o ra uid
OTM should return your BIS9 rate.
u tt@ ent G
himYourSResults…
tud
Enter the results of the rate query below:
Field n t
a hi s
Enter
lik
Rate Offering ID
ik ฺh use t
u
Rate Record a rth to
Mode u tt (k cense
Cost
n t him ble li
u likacostswas
This f a
erentered
ik H as r400anEUR. Why is the
th - t
r non different?
K a cost
Running a Vessel Rate Query

Find Rates
Ship From Location ID DEBRV
Ship to Location ID USHOU
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 15000 KG
Volume 1 CU FT
Click Save to right of Commodities grid.

Click Search
OTM should return your ACLU rate.
Enter the results of the rate query below:
Rate Offering ID
Rate Record
Mode
Cost
Running a Second Truckload Rate Query

Field
s
Enter This Data… a
Find Rates ) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
Ship From Location ID USHOU ora uid
u tt@ ent G
im tud
Ship to Location ID SACRAMENTO
Transport Handling Unit LARGE BOX nth
lik a hi s S
Ship Unit Count 1
ik ฺhu use t
Weight
a r h LBto
t30000
Volume
u tt (k ce1nCUseFT
Click thi
m le li Save to right of Commodities grid.
k n
a erab
li
u nsf
Click Search
H
r th
OTM ikshould
n - tra your Coyote Carrier truckload
return
no the results of the rate query below:
Ka rate. Enter
Rate Offering ID
Rate Record
Mode
Cost

Solution – Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates
You successfully ran rate queries for truckload and vessel rates.
Running a Truckload Rate Query

Rate Offering ID BIS9 TL
Rate Record ID BIS9 POL-DEU

Transport Mode TL
Cost Varies with exchange rate but roughly USD 394.28
This cost was entered User preferences tell OTM to display in USD.
as 400 EUR. Why is the
cost different?
s a
) h a
om
Running a Vessel Rate Query
c lecฺ eฺ
Field
ra uid
o
Rate Offering ID ACLU VESSEL
u tt@ ent G
ACLU DEU-USA him tud
Rate Record ID
n t S
Mode l
VESSEL-CO
u ika this
Cost
thikฺhUSD use
665.00
(kar se to
utt cen
t
Running a Truckload
n
m le li
hiRatebQuery
u lika sField
fera Enter Your Results…
ik H RateraOffering
n ID COY9 TL
th - t
r nonRate Record ID
Ka COY9 HOU-SAC
Mode TL
Cost 986.00 USD
Solution – Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates

Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg
Itinerary
Viewing a Multi-leg Itinerary
2. Enter an Itinerary ID of POLAND.

4. Click the ID.
 Note the Parameters tab. When you define a multi-leg itinerary in OTM, both the
Parameters tab and the Lane Definitions tab are similar to other itineraries. The
difference is in how you define the legs.
 For direct, multi-stop, and multi-leg shipments, you define the source and destination at
the high level on the Parameters tab.
 s a
5.
For a multi-stop shipment, you also mark the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box.
Click the Lane Definitions tab. ) h a
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
For direct, multi-stop, and multi-leg shipments, you enter details on the source and
ra uid
destination locations based on data you entered previously in the Parameters tab. For
o
tt@ ent G
example, on the Parameters tab, you entered a source geo hierarchy of COUNTRY. On the
u
Land Definition tab, OTM requires you to enter a source geography country code ID.
6. Click the List Legs tab.
n thim Stud
 For direct and multi-stop shipments, youik
l a onehleg
enter is defining equipment and mode
u t
details.
h
For multi-leg shipments, yourtdefine
ikฺheach u sofethe shipment with associated

( k a assignment
e to type, sequence, and priority.
leg
tt ceright
information such as equipment,
u s
n of the leg with a Sequence Number of 1.
m icon) toithe
Note thatnthisthiis thebfirst
7. Click edit (the pencil
l
le leg; therefore, the Sequence Number is 1.

a a

HNote fer Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment.
ulikthenEquipment
s
r th ik Note
n - trthea Location Role of PORT.
Ka  noNote DEBRV.
the Location ID of DEBRV. In this example, the first leg ends at the port of
 Note the Mode Profile ID of TL.

 Note the Equipment Group Profile ID is 40 OCEAN CONTAINER.
9. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the leg with a Sequence Number of
2.
 Note the Sequence Number is 2 because this is the second leg.
 Note the Primary check box is marked. OTM applies order release constraints to
primary legs.
 Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.
 Note the Location Role of PORT.
 Note the Location ID of USHOU. In this example, the second leg ends at the port
of USHOU.
 Note the Mode Profile ID. The mode for this leg is Vessel – CO which stands for vessel
container.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary

11. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the leg with a Sequence Number of 3.
 For the last leg to the final destination, the Sequence Number is 3.
 Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.
 Note the Location Role and Location ID are blank. On the final leg, you do not need to
define a location role or location ID since this is specified as the destination location
on the Lane Definition tab.
 Note the Mode Profile ID. The mode for this leg is TL.
 After entering all leg information, the List Legs tab displays the leg ID, leg name,
sequence number, destination location, service provider profile ID, and mode profile
s a
ID.
) h a
 Note the Leg ID which is a unique identifier generated by OTM.
o m
ฺc IDฺ to
Note the Service Provider Profile ID. You can enter a service providereprofile

c l
force OTM to use certain service provider(s) on the leg.
o ra uide
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
u lika this
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary

Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary
Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary
OTM displays the Parameters tab.
3. Enter an Itinerary ID of POLAND

CA MULTILEG.
5. Select the Itinerary Type of Active.
6. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of
COUNTRY.
7. Select a Destination Geo
Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. s a
8. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the ) h a
om
page. OTM displays the Lane Definitions tab.
c lecฺ eฺ
9. Enter the Source Geography Country Code ID
ora uid
tt@ ent G
of POL.
u
him Stud
10. Enter the Destination Geography Province
Code of CA.
nt
11. Click List Legs.
ulika this
ikฺh use
OTM displays the List Legs tab.
th
12. Click New Leg.
(kar se to
u tt cen
OTM displays the Leg page.
thi ble li
m
13. Enter a Sequence Number of 1.
n
lika sfera
14. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of
u
ik H ran
Optimize Equipment.
a rth non-t
15. Select the Location Role of PORT.
K 16. Enter a Location ID of DEBRV.
17. Select the Mode Profile ID of TL.
18. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 40
OCEAN COMPATIBLE (already created).
OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the first leg
has been added to the page.
20. Click New Leg.
OTM displays the Leg page.
21. Enter a Sequence Number of 2.
22. Mark the Primary check box.
23. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-
use Equipment.
24. Select the Location Role of PORT.
25. Enter a Location ID of USHOU.
26. Select the Mode Profile ID of VESSEL-CO.
27. Enter an Equipment Group Profile
Copyright ID of
© 2014, Oracle 40its affiliates. All rights reserved.
and/or
OCEAN
Practice COMPATIBLE
1 - Creating (already created).
a Multi-leg Itinerary
28. Click Save at the bottom of the page. Chapter 1 - Page 276
OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the second
leg has been added to the page.
32. Select the Mode Profile ID of TL.
33. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE (already created).
OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the final leg has been added to the page.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary

You successfully created a multi-leg itinerary with an ID of POLAND CA MULTILEG.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates

Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates
Running a Route and Rates Query

Find Rate and Route
Date Deliver By Today’s date plus 3 months

Ship From Location ID WARSAW PLANT
Ship To Location ID SACRAMENTO
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 30000 LB
s a
Volume 1 CU FT ) h a
Save to the far right of the Commoditiese o
ฺc ฺ m
Click
c l grid.
Click Search ora uide
u tt@ ent G
him Stud
OTM should return your truckload, vessel, and truckload
rate. Enter the results of the rate query below: n t
Field u lika Enter t h s Results…
iYour
th ikฺh use
ar se to
Itinerary ID
Total Actual Cost tt (k n
m u li c e
t
Which rate
n hihas anble
u lika sfera
accessorial?
ik H (Click r n plus sign to

athe
th - t
r noncosts fortoeach
K a expand show the
leg. Then
click the costs for each
leg to determine which
one has the accessorial)
How much is the

accessorial?
Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates

Solution – Querying for Route and Rates
You successfully ran the query for rate and route.
Running a Rate Query

Itinerary ID POLAND CA MULTILEG
Total Actual Cost USD 2045.28

Which rate has an ACLU DEU-USA
accessorial?
How much is the USD 120.00
accessorial?
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Querying for Route and Rates

Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules
Viewing an Auto Assignment Rule
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Auto Assignment
Rule.
2. Enter an Auto Assignment Rule ID of SAC.
4. Click the ID.

 OTM displays the Header tab of the Auto Assign Rule Manager.
 Note the Stop after 1st Assignment check box. Mark the check box to have the rule
considered as complete as soon as it writes data. For example, you can create a
rule that automatically populates involved party data for any new order base based
on specific criteria (that you define on the Criteria tab).
 Note the Active check box.
s a

) h a
Note the Run on Create check box. Mark the check box to specify that this rule will run
o m
when the business object is created. If you leave the check box unmarked, the rule will
c lecฺ eฺ
run only on modification of the business object based on the event specified in the
Event field in the rule.
o ra uid

u tt@ ent G
Note the Auto Assign Type ID that defines what data this rule assigns. In this example,
n t him Stud
OTM assigns an involved party to a new order release. Refer to the OTM online help
to see a full list of valid values for this field.
 Note the Pre Qual Criteria ID. You can u lika tuse
optionally h isthis section to construct criteria to
h ikฺh foruprocessing.
eliminate a rule from being considered
t se

(
Note the Event field. You k ar mapsean tagent
can o to an auto assignment rule so that, if a
utt cthe
business object is changed,
e nauto assignment rule will run.
im
htab. li
a n t
5. Click the Criteria
a b le ID. In this example, the involved party assignment is
Note the k
baseduon er of the order release.
li the destination
Auto Assign
s f
Criteria
6.hik
H ran tab.
Click the-tDefinition
t
r norule n assigns the SAC_PLANNER as the LOGISTICS involved party when the
Ka This destination is SACRAMENTO.
 Involved Party of SAC PLANNER
 Communication Method of BY CONTACT
 Involved Party Qualifier of LOGISTICS
 Destination Location of SACRAMENTO
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules

Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules
Creating an Auto Assignment Rule
You will set up an auto assignment rule that will look for the creation of an order release with a
destination location of Sacramento. The rule will add an involved party of SAC PLANNER to the
newly created order release.
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Auto Assignment
Rule.
OTM displays the Auto Assignment Rule search tab.
3. Enter an Auto Assign Rule ID of
SAC INV PTY.
4. Select the Auto Assign Type ID of
s a
ORDER_RELEASE_INVOLVED_PA
) h a
RTY.
om
5. Click Criteria at the bottom of the page.
c lecฺ eฺ
OTM displays the Criteria tab. ora uid
6. Select the Auto Assign Criteria ID of
u tt@ ent G
ORDER_DESTINATION.
thim tud
7. Click Save to the right of the Auto
lik a hi s S
n
Assign Criteria ID field.
k h
ฺ u se t
r
8. Click Definition at the bottom of the i
th to u
a
tt (k cense
page. OTM displays the Definition tab.
u li
him
9. Enter a Seq of 1.
n t le
lik a erab
10. Enter an Involved Party of SAC
PLANNER.
H n s f
ua Communication
th ikCONTACT.
11. Select
- tra Method of BY
r non
Ka 12. Select an Involved Party Qualifier of
LOGISTICS.
13. Enter a Destination Location of
What will happen when an
SACRAMENTO.
order release is created with
14. Click
the Save to theof
destination right of the Destination
Location field.
SACRAMENTO?
15. Click Save to the right of the Involved
Party Qualifier drop-down list.
17. Answer the following:
Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Solution – Configuring Auto Assignment Rules
You successfully created an auto assignment rule with an ID of SAC INV PTY.
Creating an Auto Assignment Rule

What will happen when an OTM assigns SAC PLANNER as the logistics involved
order release is created with party to the order release.

the destination of
SACRAMENTO?
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases
Viewing an Order Release
2. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA.
4. Click the ID.

 Note the Splittable check box. Mark the check box to allow splitting of the order. This
check box has priority over the Splittable check boxes on the Ship Unit tab. If not
marked, the order cannot be split at all. The Splittable check box is marked by
default.
 Note the Status button. Click Status to display the current status types and status
values that are assigned to the order release. You can create your own status types
and values that you can assign to an order release.
s a
 Note the Priority. Enter a priority if you want to differentiate some order releases as a
) h a
m
high, medium or low priority for planning purposes. Valid values are 1-999. The higher
o
the number, the higher the priority.
c lecฺ eฺ
Note the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. This means thera id will be

o u
order release
G
based on line items.
u tt@to anenorder
t
 Note the Source Location and Destination Location.
t h im on tyour
Similar
u d order release.
base you
must have a source location and a destination
lik an his S
location
ฺhu use byt transport handling unit (THU)

5. Click the Ship Unit tab.
This tab displays the ship units on h ik
art sitems
the order release
k
as well as the distribution of packaged
( e toon each THU.
6. Click the Line Item tab. u tt cen
 The Line Item th m le li each line item (packaged item) on the order and its
i tab displays
n
a oneship rabunits based on the order configuration and the packaging attributes
likitem.
distribution
ofuthe s f
ik HThe line
ra n
r th 
n - t line summary
item page for an order release is different from an order base in
Ka nothe line item). You can manually
that each item displays the ship units that contain the line item (indented beneath
enter ship units and their corresponding line items on
an order release or you can have OTM calculate the appropriate ship units based on
the number of line items and their attributes.
7. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the line item ID POL-CA-001.
 This order release line item details page displays the attributes of an order release
line item. These are the general attributes for the line item and are not specific to any
ship unit.
 Many of the attributes that appear here are the same as those that are available on
an order base.
 Note the Packaged Item ID.
 Note the Weight. You can enter your amount in any unit of measure but OTM displays
the amount according to your user preferences.
9. Click the Constraints tab.

 OTM provides a variety of constraints that you can place on an order (order-level
constraints) or itinerary leg (leg-level) that help you control how orders are bundled and
how shipments are created for orders.
 If you decide not to use these constraints (itinerary, rate, and service provider),
OTM’s optimization engine determines the best choice during the shipment planning
process.
 The Constraints tab is where you would specify order level constraints such as:
 Buy or sell fixed itinerary

 Buy or sell rate offering
 Equipment
 Buy or sell service providers
 Rate service
 As well as, leg level constraints
s a
10. Click the Involved Parties tab.
) h a
m
Note that OTM automatically added the involved party of SAC PLANNER because of
o
c lecฺ eฺ
the auto assignment rule set up in the previous lesson.
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases
Reviewing the Business Monitor
1. Click Business Monitor at the top of the page.
2. Enter the results of the Business Monitor below.
At the conclusion of the exercise you will review the Business Monitor again to see
which queries have changed.
Saved Query Name Enter Your Results…

ORDER BASE-NO RELEASES
ORDER RELEASE-NEW
SHIPMENT-NEW
SHIPMENT-DELAYED
s a
) h a
3. Close the Business Monitor page. om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
OTM displays the Order Release search tab.
nthim Stud
OTM displays the Order Release tab. ฺhul
ika this
th ik u se
ar sedate.
( k to
u tt cen date plus 3 months.
7. Enter an Early Pickup Date of today’s
Date oflitoday’s
t im
8. Enter a Late Delivery
hConfiguration
le of ONE_TO_ONE.
a
9. Select an Ordern ab
10. Enteru alSource fer of WARSAW PLANT.
ik sLocation
11. ik
H ran Location of SACRAMENTO.
th - t
Enter a Destination
r Select
Ka 12. n onthe Reference Number Qualifier of PO.
13. Enter a Reference Number of 093382.
16. Click New Line Item near the middle of the page.
OTM displays the Line Item details page.
17. Enter a Packaged Item ID of SOCKS.
18. Enter a Weight of 4500 KG.
OTM returns to the Line Item tab with your new
entry of SOCKS now in the section.
21. Enter a Packaged Item ID of T SHIRTS.

OTM returns to the Line Item tab with your new entry of T SHIRTS now in the
section.
25. Enter a Packaged Item ID of SHORTS.

OTM returns to the Line Item tab with the
three line items displayed.
29. From the confirmation page, click
s a
Edit.
Whatthe
30. Click involved party
Involved is on the
Parties tab. ) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
order release?
c l
How was this involved party
o ra uid
tt@ ent G
assigned, since you did not
assign it when entering the u
order?
n thim Stud
ulikaWhichthsaved
31. Click Business Monitor at the top of the page. is query has been updated
from this exercise?
th ikฺh use
Field
(k ar se to Enter Your Results…
Saved Query Name utt e n
m
hi ble li c
n t
li a sfeMonitor
32. Close thekBusiness
u ra page.
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Creating Order Releases
You successfully reviewed the OTM Business Monitor and created an order release with an ID
of POL-CA.
Reviewing Business Monitor

Saved Query Name Enter Your Results…
ORDER BASE-NO RELEASES 1 (All of these values can vary if student has
deviated from the exercises in any way.)
Note: This is an order base in the
SHAREDCORE domain that will be used for a
demonstration later in the class.
ORDER RELEASE-NEW 0
SHIPMENT-NEW 0
s a
SHIPMENT-DELAYED 1
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
Creating an Order Release ora uid
Question
u @ nt G
Enter YourttAnswers…
th im tude
an his S
What involved party is on the SAC PLANNER
order release?
lik tRule
ik ฺhuAssignment
Auto
u s e
assigned, since you did not arth
How was this involved party
to
t t
assign it when entering the(k nse
order?
im u li c e
a nth ble
u lik Field
sfera
ik H ran Enter Your Results…
rth Saved n t Name

-Query ORDER_RELEASE-NEW
K a n o
Solution – Creating Order Releases

Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail
To audit data changes, you must:
 Turn auditing on
 Turn auditing on for each object you need
 Subscribe to changes for those objects
Before you can audit any records, you must add at least one contact (per domain) using
the Communication Manager. The contact must be assigned the audit (AUD)
communication method. Then you can assign the contact to the specific OTM events you
want to audit.
By default, any user in that domain that is assigned to the DEFAULT level can perform an audit.
The OTM Administrator can restrict audit access using the security services options.
All audit records are stored in the domain where the contact that has auditing privileges
resides. If your OTM installation has multiple domains or sub-domains, you can configure the
audit contact to store audit records in a specific domain so that you can audit other domains.
s a
) h a
Turning On Auditing
o m
cฺ changes
Note: You must have the property glog.audit.beforeafter set to on to be able tole
ra c see
id eฺ to
each database column. This is turned on for the training server.
@ o> AuditGControl.
u
1. Click Business Process Automation > Audit Trail Management tt
u de n t
th im tu
a n is S
3. Click the ID.
u likyour domain.
th

th ikฺhando for
OTM displays the Audit Control page
Here you turn auditing on inrgeneral
for
u e
sspecific

( ka e t business objects.

u e s which business object you want to audit. In this
Select a Data QueryttType to specify
nselected.
him ble li
example, ORDER RELEASE c is
n t
u ka Contact
Creating anliAudit
fe ra
H Businessa s
n Process Automation > Communication Manager > Contacts.
ik
4. Click
tr
a r5.th Enter
no na -Contact ID of PLANNER.
K 6. Click Search at the bottom of the page.
7. Click the ID.
 At the bottom of the page, note the Subject of ORDER – MODIFIED. The audit trail
will be recorded whenever an order is modified.
 In the Com Method ID field, note the entry of AUD for auditing.
 Note the domain in the Domain Name field that determines where you want to store
audit records. This allows users in another domain to perform an audit on the
records from your current domain.
Viewing Audited Business Objects

You define which business objects to audit in the Notify Subject Manager.
In this example, you audit order bases when there is a modification.
Notification.
10. Enter a Contact Notification ID of ORDER - MODIFIED.
11. Click Search at the bottom of ©the
Copyright page.
2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

12. Click the ID.
 OTM displays the Contact Notification manager for the Subject ID of ORDER
– MODIFIED.
 In the Contacts section, use contact notification to subscribe to the changes you
want to audit.
 To audit rather than receive notification, use the Communication Method AUD.
 In this example, you want to audit orders releases when there is a modification.
Viewing the Audit Information

Once you have set up auditing, you are able to see audit records in two locations:
 Audit Trail Manager
Manger for the OTM business object you want to audit
For example, in the Order Release Manager, you could:
13. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order s a
Release. ) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
c l
ora uid
tt@ ent G
16. Click the ID.
u
him Stud
OTM displays the Order Release tab of the Order
Manager.
nt
ulika this
17. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Reference
Number Qualifier of PO.
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
18. Change the Reference Number to something else.
u tt cen
20. Click Finished at
n thithe topblofetheli page.
m
lik a the econfirmation
OTM displays ra page.
21. MarkHuthe checkn f
sbox on the
ik -t
th ClickoActionsra
confirmation page.
a r22. n n
K > Order Management > View > Audit Trail.
OTM displays the Audit Trail search tab.
Here you can limit your audit to a certain time window, a
certain user, or certain action.
24. Click any ID.
OTM displays the Audit Trail Entry page.
 Here you can see the data that was changed, the user who changed the data, and
the time it was changed.
 OTM can only populate the Reason section if you have configured OTM to
require users to enter a reason when changing data.
25. Close the Audit Trail Entry page.

Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments
Building Shipments
You build a multi-leg shipment from the order release you entered previously.
1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order
Release. OTM displays the Order Release search tab.

4. Mark the check box next to your order release.
5. Click Actions at the top of the page.
6. Click Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Direct.
OTM displays the Create Direct Shipment / Equipment Prompt
s a
page.
) h a
7. Click OK without entering any information.
om
c lecฺ eฺ
8. Enter the shipmentIDIDs, modes, and Mode o a uid
rProvider
tt@ ent G
Shipment Service
service providers.
u
nthim Stud
u lika this
thikฺh use
9. Close the confirmation page. ar to
(k
tt cen s e
Mapping and Plotting m
i u
Shipments li
n thManagement
le
b > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments.
lik a
10. Click Shipment
ra
OTM u
H displays
n s
thefeBuy Shipment search tab.
r
11. ik
th n - ra Release tab.
Click the tOrder
Ka 12. n o an Order Release ID of POL-CA.

Enter
14. Mark the check boxes next to the three shipments just created.
15. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments.
OTM displays the map with all of your shipments. The multi-leg shipment you just created
has three shipments, with each shipment transporting the order from Warsaw, Poland, to
Sacramento, CA, USA. The order is moving truckload from Warsaw to Bremerhaven,
vessel to Houston, and truckload to Sacramento.
16. What color is the vessel movement?
Vessel Mode
17. What color are the TL movements?

TL Mode
18. Close the map page.

19. On the Buy Shipment results page, click Actions > Shipment Management > View >
Plot Related Shipments.

OTM displays the plot with all of your shipments.
20. Click Summaries > Cost by Service Provider.
21. How much does the Coyote Carrier (COY9) shipment cost?
Shipment Cost
s a
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
22. Close the Service Provider Facts page.
c l
ra uid
23. Close the Summaries menu.
o
tt@ ent G
24. Close the Related Shipment Plot page.
u
nthim Stud
ulika this
t hikฺh use
( kar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Solution – Planning Multi-leg Shipments
OTM successfully built three shipments and you plotted the shipments.
Creating Shipments
Shipment ID Mode Service Provider
nnnnn TL BIS9
nnnnn VESSEL-CO ACLU

nnnnn TL COY9
Mapping and Plotting Shipments

s a
Vessel Mode grayish
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
Field ra uid
o
TL Mode green
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
lik a hi s
Field
ik u
ฺh usEntere t Your Results…
Shipment Cost
a rth986.00toUSD
utt (k cense
n t him ble li
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Planning Multi-leg Shipments

Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements
Viewing Order Movements
When you built the multi-leg shipment in the previous practice, OTM automatically created
order movements. Let’s review those order movements.
1. Go to Order Management > Order Movement > Order
Movement. OTM displays the Order Movement search page.

OTM displays the Order Movements results page.
 Note that OTM created three order movements. One for each leg of the multi-stop
shipment: one for the first TL leg, one for the vessel leg and a third for the final TL
leg.
4. Select all three order movements. s a
5. Click View to view the order movements. ) h a
o m
lecฺ deฺ
6. Let’s review the first order movement which has an ID of POL-CA-001.
 Note the Order Movement ID which is generated by the BusinessaNumber c
rcreated. ui
o G
tt@
Generator and cannot be changed after the order movement is
Note the Perspective which identifies whether this is aubuy n t
ethe shipment

h im t
t was created;u d
(B) or sell (S) order
movement. The perspective is determined by the
an is S
perspective of or
u l ik
itinerary depending on how the order movement
th for example, from
an order release or shipment.
i ฺh use
kwhich
 r
Note the Creation Process Type
a th t oidentifies whether the order movement was
tt (k n se
created from an order release (SYSTEM-ITINERARY) or from a shipment (SYSTEM-
ACTIONS).
im u lice

nth
Note the Order
a b
Release
a
e ID and Shipment ID fields which display the order release
lmovement
from k
u er
li movement.
which this order
sf
was created and the shipment associated with this
ik H ran
order
a rth noNote
 -tthe Source and Destination Location ID fields. This specific order movement
nfrom
K is Warsaw to DEBRV, so it represents the first leg in this multi-stop movement.
 Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date which were copied from the
order release.
 Note Original Leg Position which is a relative position of the original leg to the primary
leg in the itinerary such that a primary leg's position is 0 and positions for legs to left
of the primary legs (pre-transport) are -1, -2, etc. Positions for legs after the primary
leg are 1, 2, etc. So in our scenario, the second leg of the itinerary, the vessel leg,
was marked as primary, so this first leg has an original leg position of -1.
 The Total Weight, Total Volume, and Total Ship Unit Count fields are all calculated
from the ship units on the order movement.
7. Note the Constraints section.
This section gives you the opportunity to create/view/edit additional information about the
order movement, including equipment group information, service provider information,
rating, and transit time.
8. Note the Ship Units grid.
The Ship Unit ID is the shipment ship unit ID and it appears when the order movement
is planned on a shipment.

9. Click Next to view the second order movement.
10. Note the Order Movement ID of POL-CA-002.
11. Note the Original Leg Position of 0. This is set to 0 because this is the vessel leg
which was marked as the primary leg on the itinerary.
12. Note the Source and Destination Location IDs of DEBRV and USHOU. This order
movement represents the leg traveling from the port of Bremerhaven to the port of
Houston.
13. Click Next to view the final order movement.

14. Note the Order Movement ID of POL-CA-003.
15. Note the Original Leg Position of 1.
16. Note the Source and Destination Location IDs of USHOU and SACRAMENTO. This
order movement represents the final leg traveling from the port of Houston to the
Sacramento, CA.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements
When you built the multi-leg shipment in the previous practice, OTM automatically created
order movements. Let’s review those order movements.
Viewing Order Movements

1. Go to Order Management > Order Movement > Order Movement.

OTM displays the Order Movements results page.
4. Select all three order movements.
5. Click View to view the order movements.
6. Let’s see what locations the first order movement is traveling between:
Field Value
s a
Order Movement ID
) h a
om
Source Location ID
c lecฺ eฺ
Destination Location ID
o ra uid
u tt@ ent G
n thiismtraveling
8. Let’s see what locations this second order movement
S
d
tubetween:
Field Value
ulika this
Order Movement ID
thikฺh use
(k ar se to
tt cen
Source Location ID
i
Destination Locationm u
ID li
n th le
li k a Position
Original Leg
fe rab
ik Huis theraoriginal
Why n s leg
a rth position
o n -tset to 0?
K 9. Clickn Next at the top of the page.
10. Let’s see what locations this order movement is going between:
Field Value
Order Movement ID
Source Location ID
Destination Location ID
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements

Solution – Viewing Order Movements
You successfully viewed the three order movement automatically created by OTM when you
planned your order release POL-CA into shipments.
For the first order movement:
Field Value
Order Movement ID POL-CA-001
Source Location ID WARSAW PLANT

Destination Location ID DEBRV
Let’s see what locations this order movement is going between:
Field Value
Order Movement ID POL-CA-002
s a
Source Location ID DEBRV
) h a
Destination Location ID USHOU om
c lecฺ eฺ
Original Leg Position 0
o ra uid
Why is the original leg t@legeisnt G
tthat
This is the order movement associated
u
position set to 0?
t h im Thetuorder
with the vessel movement and
set to primary on the itinerary. d
n S
u likaalways
movement associated
th is primary
with the
kฺhof 0. use
leg of the itinerary has an original
h i
leg position
t
r e to
(k amovement
u t
Let’s see what locations this torder
c e ns is going between:
Field
thim ble Value li
n
lika sfeIDra POL-CA-003
Order Movement
u
ik H Location
ran ID
th
Source
- t USHOU
Ka non Location ID SACRAMENTO

r Destination
Solution – Viewing Order Movements

Lesson 52: Network Routing
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Lesson 52: Network Routing

Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File
Viewing the System Log File
1. Click Order Management > Process Management.
You can access the log files from the Process Management page.
2. Under Logs, click System.
 Note the From field. You can enter a date and time from which the log you want to
view log entries.
3. In the From field, change the time to 1 hour before the current time.
 Note the Log drop-down list which contains the following options:
 SYSTEM – For logging system events.
 WEB – Controls web server logging. These settings control all aspects of web
logging including the filename, maximum size, backup count and enabled log IDs. If
you modify Web settings via power data, all web servers are notified and retrieve s a
)
the modified settings on the next servlet use. You can create any number of web log h a
o m
files. Each web log will be written to the web tier, and accessible via the System log
c lecฺ eฺ
viewer. If no Web log exists (or web properties suppress its use), web-tier logging
reverts to using properties.
o ra uid
tt@ ofeanntOTM G action
 EXCEPTION – Captures any problem that halts execution
u
imfor technical
d support
or workflow. This log includes a trace of the error
th S t u
purposes.
lik anuser hlogs.
i s
 Note – You may see other logs which
ฺkhu user.are
e t name ofuser
A log is a custom log that
captures log messages for a ispecific
t h u s The this log varies depending
on what it is named when
k a r e to
created. You should see the log “Admin” which is a
custom log.
tt ( n s
u
im le li
4. Select a Log of SYSTEM. c e
n th

lik aregardless
Note the
r aofbIfseverity.
Severities.
fe
you do not select any severities, OTM finds all log
H u ns
entries You can select one or more severities which
r th ik n-tra
include:
Ka no Debug – Logs debug messages, including their start and complete times. Note:
Log files that record debug messages may reduce your system performance. When
running a debug log, carefully select the business processes that it monitors.
 Error – Logs error messages for failed or otherwise stopped processes.
 Explanation – Logs explanation messages.
 Performance – Logs summarized performance information about selected
business processes.
 Performance Detail – Logs the start and stop times, and other details, of
selected business processes.
 Warning – Logs warning messages. Warnings occur prior to errors.
 Note the IDs. Select one or more IDs of business processes to be logged. Refer to
the OTM online help to see a list of all log IDs.
 Note Search For field. To find one or more specific log items, type characters in the
Search For field.
You can search for any log item (for example, a specific order ID, shipment ID, or time
stamp). Numbers, letters, and other characters can be entered.
 Note the Ignore Case check box. Mark the Ignore Case check box to control
case- sensitive searches
Copyright using the Search
© 2014, Oracle For field.
and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

 Note Top Level Process. The field shows an ID for the process that was performed. In
most cases, you should leave this field as is unless you are performing a search for a
specific process. Then, you would enter the appropriate ID.
5. Ensure the Entries per Page is set to 1000.
 Note the Search All Backups check box. If you select the check box, OTM searches
all backup files in addition to the current log. To search the current log, do not select
this check box.
 Note the Save to File check box. If you want to save the results as a file, select
this check box.
6. Click View Results at the bottom of the page. The Log Viewer opens.
 Note the Time column. This column contains the exact date and time that this
corresponding system log entry was written to the log file. The time is pulled from
the OTM server and may differ from the time on your workstation.
 Note the Process column. Each OTM process, such as, tendering, building a
s a
shipment, etc. is given a process ID by OTM. You can search on or look for a specific
process ID when troubleshooting. ) h a
o m
ฺc ฺ Error.
 Note the Severity column. When troubleshooting an issue, look for a severity
le of
 Note the ID column. When troubleshooting an issue, look for anrID
o acof Exception.
u ide
The ID column corresponds to the log file options that you
tt@ t
can set when
n G configuring
u
im tude
a log file. IDs often used when troubleshooting including:
th
 Planning
lik an his S
 RateEngine
ik ฺhu use t
 RateService
a rth to
 (
Note the System Log column.
tt k The n s eSystem Log column contains the actual log file
message or details
Log columnh ofim
u of what
li e- Nowasbase
cOTM doing. For example, an entry in the System
showsa n tOTM could

b lenot find a base costcostforcalculated.
“[INFEASIBLE] [RACGrid2.costShipment()]”
lik sfera
that a rate and therefore could not create
aushipment.
7. ik
H ratonthe bottom of the log page.
a r8.th Click
o n -t
Scroll down
K n Next.
OTM displays the next page in the log file.
9. Click Previous.
OTM displays the previous page in the log file.
10. Scroll down to the bottom of the log page.
11. Click Return returns to the System Log Entry Selection finder.
12. Close this page.
Viewing the Integration Log File

14. Under Logs, click Integration. The Integration Log Entry Selection page opens.
 Note the From field. You can enter a date and time from which you want to view log
entries. For this demonstration, we will not change the date and time.
 Note the Message Classes drop-down list which contains the following options. Note: If
no message classes are selected, all are included in the log.
 I (Informational) - Describes an event.

 W (Warning) - Describes the precondition to an error.
 E (Error) - Describes a failure to complete processing.
 Note the Search For field. To find one or more specific log items, enter data in the
Search For field. For example, you can search for a transmission number. Numbers,
letters, and other characters can be entered.
 Note the Ignore Case check box. If needed, mark Ignore Case for your query.
 Note the Entries per Page field. If needed, change the number entries per page
to appear in the log. 100 is the default.
15. Click View Results at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the log file.
 Note the Time column that displays when this entry occurred. The time is pulled
from the OTM server and may differ from the time on your workstation.
 Note the other columns which include:
s a
 Transmission
) h a
 Transaction
om
 Written By
c lecฺ eฺ
 Class
ora uid
 Code
u tt@ ent G
 Integration Log
nthim Stud
ulika this
16. Click Return to return to the log selection page.
17. Close the page.
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File
Viewing the Setup of a User Log File
1. Click Configuration and Administration > Power Data > General > Log Files.
3. Click the ID containing ADMIN.
 If you are creating a user log file, its log ID must match a system user name, without
its DOMAIN/SUBDOMAIN prefix. For example, if the user name is GUEST.ADMIN, the
log ID would be ADMIN.
 In this example, the Domain Name to be monitored is COREDEMO.
4. Ensure that the Type of User is selected.
The following options are available in the Type drop-down list:
 Ad Hoc - For logging selected business processes, such as integration and bulk
planning. s a
 System - For logging events throughout the system. ) h a
o m

leฺc eฺ
User - For logging the events pertaining to a specific user. If using this type,
c
the
ID must match a user, for example, Admin.
o ra uid
 Web - Controls web server logging.
5. Verify that the On check box is marked. It is marked bym u tt@ ent G
hi Stud
default.
n t
ika this
This activates this log.
6. Note the Filename of coredemoadmin.log. u l
OTM saves your log entries to a file
th ikฺhthis name.
with u seBy default,
OTM saves the log file to
(k ar se to
<otm_install_dir>/logs/. tt n
7. Ensure that the h im u li c e
n t Append
le
check box is marked. It is marked by
default.
lik a erab

H Ifuyou do not
n s fmark the Append check box, OTM deletes the log file at each
r th ik new n - ra
tsession.
Ka  noNote the entry of Max Size (in bytes) of 10000000. OTM starts a new log file
when reaching this limit.
 Note the entry of Backups is 5. This indicates the number of backups of the file to
be saved. For example, if you specify three backups of files 10 MB in size, a total of
30 MB of log files will be saved. The default setting is 5.
 Logging does affect performance. It is not recommended to increase the maximum
size. Rather than increase the size, you may want to increase the number of
backups.
8. Scroll down to see a list of processes in the Log File Details section.
 This section contains a list of Process IDs that you can configure for a log.
 Refer to the OTM online help for a list of all Process IDs.
9. In the On list, select Agent.
10. Click the < Move Left icon to move the Process ID of Agents to the Off
list. This turns this type of logging off.
Viewing the Resulting User Log File

13. Under Logs, click System.
14. Change the From date to the day before today.
15. Select a Log of ADMIN.
16. Click View Results at the bottom of the page.
The data contained in a user log file is identical to what you saw earlier in the system log file
with one exception: you only see the log information for the specific domain name that this log
is attached to which, in this case, is COREDEMO.
When viewing log files, you can navigate between backup files. If you are viewing a particular
backup file (either via a search all backups or an explicit backup view), you can click Next at
the end of the file to move to the next backup file.
Logging for Oracle Technical Support
Default Logging Settings

Depending on the issue you have run into, you may need to provide additional information
or enable different logging options. As a rule, Oracle Technical Support likes you to have the
s a
following logging options enabled in the system log:
) h a
o m
ecฺ eฺ
 Agent
c l
ra uid
 Planning
o
tt@ ent G
 Workflow
u
him Stud
 WorkflowDetails
n t
Note: Some logging options write a great deal of information to the logs and should be
lika this
disabled unless you need to investigate a particular issue. This is especially true for Sql,
u
ikฺh use
OrderBundlingDetails, PlanningDetails, RateEngineDebug, and RateEngineDetails.
th
Troubleshooting OTM – What (to k r on ein the
aTurn to Logs
u tt youcare e s
nworking in and the problem type, technical support
m
Depending on the area of OTM
hi logging l i
a n t
will like to have different
a b leSupport
options enabled. To see a list of logs to enable when while
u lik sfer
troubleshooting, see My Oracle note # 387267.1.
i k H ran
a rth non-t
K

Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary
To learn what tables contain foreign keys into other tables, you can look in the OTM Data
Dictionary. The OTM Data Dictionary contains all tables and their columns in the OTM
database. When OTM is installed, you can find the OTM Data Dictionary under
http:/servername/html/data_dict as detailed in the steps below.
The following steps are recommended so that the data dictionary opens in the online
help window instead of replacing the OTM window:
1. The easiest way to view the Data Dictionary it to first click the Help button at the top of
the OTM page.
2. In the Address bar of your browser, delete all text after html/ and type data_dict.
3. Press Enter to view the Data Dictionary.
4. Next, scroll down until you see the LOCATION_REMARK table link in the left-hand pane.
5. Click the LOCATION_REMARK table link.
s a
) h a
B. This frame shows
A. This frame shows all tables.
om
details of one table at
c lecฺ eฺ
a time.
D. There is an asterisk
o ra notes. uid
tt@ ent G
next to primary keys. C. There are additional
u
nthim Stud
u lika this
th ikฺh use
( k ar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
E. This frame shows

additional notes as indicated
by C.
The following text adds more

detail about each of the
callouts in the graphic above:

 A. The table list frame on the left shows all of the tables in the OTM database
exactly as they are named in the database. The tables are listed in alphabetical
order in this frame.
 B. The largest frame on the right side shows the details of one table at a time. To
view table details here, click on a table name link in the table list frame.
Table details include:

 Table name
 All rows in the table along with what type of data can be entered into that row.
 There may be a brief listing of what type of data can or cannot be entered
into that row (e.g., VARCHAR, NUMBER, DATE).
 For some row names, you will see a link proceeded by FK which stands for
foreign key. This indicates that this row is a foreign key to the table in the link.
 Directly following the list of all rows, you may see a list titled “Tables that FK into
s a
h a
this one”. Click on any link in this list to view the information on that table.
)
m
 C. If you see an “I” icon next to the field name, this means there is more information
o
lecฺ eฺ
available about that field. Click the “I” icon to see the information in the bottom-most
c
frame on the page.
o ra uid
tt@ ent G
 D. All primary keys have an asterisk before the row name.
u
im for the
 E. The bottom-most frame lists any notes available
t h tu dselected table or row.
6. Close the OTM Data Dictionary page.
lik an his S
ik ฺhu use t
a r th to
u tt (k cense
n t him ble li
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data
Exporting CSV Data
To export OTM data in CSV format, you need to decide what to export, where to put the result,
and how to export.
1. Click Business Process Automation > Data Import/Export > CSV
Export. Using the default settings, OTM asks what you want to export.
2. Click the Export Object Type drop-down list to see the options.
You can export:
 Export Table – Exports one table at a time.
 Export Table Set – Exports all tables in a table set.
 Export Query Results – Exports all tables in a SQL query.
3. Select an Export Object Type of Export Table.
s a
h a
4. Click the Output Destination drop-down list to see the options.
)
You can export to:
om
 Browser – Exports data to your browser.
c lecฺ eฺ
 ora uid
Remote Instance – Exports data to a remote OTM
instance.
u tt@ ent G

thim Stud
File On WebServer – Exports data to a file on your OTM
n
server.
ulika this
thikฺh use
5. Select an Output Destination of Browser.

(kar se to
Note the Run Job in Background drop-down list. OTM processes your export in the
tt cen
background and emails you the result when it has finished processing. The values
u
are N for No and Y for Yes. The default is N.
nthi ble li
m
6. Click Run at the bottom of the page.
lika sfera
The next page is displayed. The fields on this page vary depending on your selections for
u
ik H ran
the above fields. The various versions of this page are not reviewed in this class.
a rth non-t
7. Verify that the Command is xcsv which will export CSV files without any parent or child
K data.
8. Select a Table Name of CORPORATION.
The tableName drop-down list includes all tables in the OTM database from which you can
export data.
9. Verify that the Exclude Public drop-down list is set to Y for yes.
If set to N, OTM will also export any data found in the PUBLIC domain.
10. Enter a Where Clause of CORPORATION_GID = ‘COREDEMO.BIG TEXAN TRUCKING’.
This is a SQL where clause.
11. Click Run.
Note: Due to an issue with Internet Explorer 9, you may see incorrect results on the
normal OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 9 below to see the
expected output.
12. Right-click and select View Source.
13. Select the contents (usually rows 16 through 19) of the output.
14. Right-click and select Copy.
15. Open Notepad.
16. Paste the content into Notepad.

17. Click File > Save As.
18. Select a Save as type of All Files.
19. Save the file locally as CORPORATION.CSV.
20. Close Notepad.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File
Exporting CSV Data
To export OTM data in CSV format, you need to decide what to export, where to put the result,
and how to export.
1. Click Business Process Automation > Data Import/Export > CSV Export.
2. Ensure that an Export Object Type value of Export Table is selected.
3. Ensure that an Output Destination value of Browser is selected.

5. Select a Table Name of CORPORATION.
6. Enter a Where Clause of CORPORATION_GID = ‘CORE###.BIG TEXAN TRUCKING’
where CORE### is your student domain name.
Note: You must type the Where Clause exactly as shown above. Be very careful about
s
adding the spaces in the appropriate places. This is an SQL query and as a result it must a
h a
be exact. Also if you named the Corporation ID on your BBT9 Service Provider something
)
om
other than BIG TEXAN TRUCKING, you need to reflect that in your SQL query.
c lecฺ eฺ
Note: Do not copy and paste the Where Clause text from the PDF file. The copy and
ora uid
paste may bring in extra unwanted control characters which can cause the CSV export to
fail.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ika this
ul
expected output.
thikฺh use
kar se to
(
u tt cen
9. Select the contents (usually rows 16 through 19) of the output.
thi ble li
m
10. Right-click and select Copy.
n
lika sfera
11. Open Notepad.
u
ik H ran
12. Paste the content into Notepad.
a rth non-t
13. Click File > Save As.
K 14. Select a Save as type of All Files.
15. Save the file locally as CORPORATION.CSV.
16. Close Notepad.
Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File

Solution – Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File
You have successfully exported the CORPORATION.CSV file from OTM.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File

Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File
Edit the corporation CSV file so that it is a new and unique corporation that you can upload
into your OTM domain.
1. Open Notepad.
2. In Notepad, click File > Open….
Notepad displays the Open window.
3. Next to Files of type:, select All

Files.
4. Navigate to location in which you saved the CORPORATION.CSV file. This is the file that
you created in the previous practice.
5. Double-click the CORPORATION.CSV file to open it.
Notepad displays the file.
6. Click Edit > Replace… .
s a
7. Enter a Find what of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING.
) h a
8. Enter a Replace with of your SOUTHWEST TRUCKING.
om
Note: Remember to use only uppercase characters.
c lecฺ eฺ
9. Click Replace All.
ora uid
10. Click Cancel.
u tt@ ent G
thim Stud
11. Delete the date entry similar to "20140416193637" from the end of the line that starts with
n
ika this
“CORE###.SOUTHWEST TRUCKING”.
ul
kฺh use
Warning: Do not delete the last three commas (,) that appear on the line. They must
t
remain in the CSV file.hi
12. Click File > Save.
(kar se to
u tt cen
hi ble li
13. Close Notepad.
t m
n
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File

Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File
You successfully edited the CORPORATON.CSV file to include a new corporation.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File

Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File
This demonstration reviews how to upload a single CSV file into OTM using the Integration
Manager.
1. In OTM, click Business Process Automation > Integration > Integration Manager.
2. Click Upload an XML/CSV Transmission.
OTM displays the Upload an XML/CSV Transmission page.
3. Click Browse… to the right of the What XML/CSV file do you want to upload? field.
4. Select a CSV file to upload. You can use the CORPORATION.CSV file that you created in
Guided Demonstration 2.
5. Click Upload.
OTM displays this page after you click Upload.
s a
) h a
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
o ra uid
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
u lika this
t h ikฺh use
(k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m

u lika
In the
s
Commandferafield, select the appropriate transaction code. The values include:
ik H i –rInserts
an CSV data into the database.
th - t
r nonii – Insert and ignore which inserts data, while suppressing unique key constraint
Ka violations.
 u – Updates data in the database.
 uu – Updates data, while suppressing “no data found” constraint violations.
 d – Deletes data from the database.
 dd – Deletes data, while suppressing “no data found” constraint violations.
 iu – Insert and update which attempts to insert data. If a record with this
primary key already exists, OTM updates the data.
 rc – Replace children which deletes all child data corresponding to the top level
parent, updates the top level parent, and inserts the new child data.
 The Data Directory field is where OTM can find the file specified in the Data File
Name field.
 This field will default to a temporary folder on the server where your CSV file
is uploaded to prior to updating the database.
 The Data File Name field contains the name of the file that you recently selected
to upload in the Upload XML/CSV Transmission page.

 If you select Run SQL Loader, OTM uses the Oracle sqlloader program to import
the CSV file instead of a java procedure.
 If you have sqlloader installed on the web server, the sqlloader is faster than the
java procedure. However, this will only work if sqlloader is installed on the OTM web
server. The following line must be added to the jserv.properties file to make
sqlloader run from the web:
wrapper.path = d:/product/oracle/ora81/bin
This entry will differ depending on the location of the Oracle bin directory.
 Xvalidate drop-down list allows you to turn on or off diagnostic messaging.
 Y – OTM gives you more diagnostics messages. This is the default.
 N – OTM turns off diagnostics messages.
 Encoding is where you indicate the encoding of the file you import.
 Common settings are ISO-8859-1 and UTF-8 (default). You especially need to
s
consider this when you import data containing characters outside the 7-bit a
h a
ASCII set. Also, consider the encoding of your database.
)
om
ecฺ eฺ
 If your file contains standard ASCII characters, then it can be encoded as ISO-
8859-
c l
ora uid
1. If it contains non-standard, international characters, then it should be encoded as
UTF-8.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File
In this practice, you import the CORPORATION.CSV file that you created previously into OTM.
1. In OTM, click Business Process Automation > Integration > Integration Manager.
2. Click Upload an XML/CSV Transmission.
OTM displays the Upload an XML/CSV Transmission page.
3. Click Browse… to the right of the What XML/CSV file do you want to upload? field.
4. Select the CORPORATION.CSV file that you edited in Practice 2.

5. Click Upload.
6. In the command drop-down list, select i for insert.
7. Leave all of the other fields on this page in their default settings.
s a
expected output.
) h a
om
c l
You should see a page with HTML text similar to the following.ecฺ eฺ
Note the ProcessCount which should be 1. ora uid
u tt@ ent G
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
nthim Stud
ka this
- <CSVUtilServletHelper>
- <CSVUtil>
uli
<Command>i</Command>
th ikฺh use
ar se to
<DataDir>/opt/oracle123/temp/upload/</DataDir>
(k
utt licen
<DataFileName>CORPORATION.CSV</DataFileName>
<ExcludePublic>true</ExcludePublic>
- <ProcessCSV> im
a n th ble
ik sfera
<xvalidate>true</xvalidate>
u l
<DatabaseGlobalName>123456</DatabaseGlobalName>
ik H<TableName>CORPORATION</TableName>
ran
th - t
r non <ColumnList>CORPORATION_GID,CORPORATION_XID,CORPORATION_NAME,IS_
Ka DOMAIN_MASTER,IS_SHIPPING_AGENTS_ACTIVE,IS_ALLOW_HOUSE_COLLECT,
MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_AMT,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_CURRENCY_GID,MAX_HOU
SE_COLLECT_AMT_BASE,PICKUP_ROUTING_SEQUENCE_GID,DROPOFF_ROUTIN
G_SEQUENCE_GID,DOMAIN_NAME,INSERT_USER,INSERT_DATE,UPDATE_USER,
UPDATE_DATE</ColumnList>
<sqlString>insert into CORPORATION (
CORPORATION_GID,CORPORATION_XID,CORPORATION_NAME,IS_DOMAIN_MA
STER,IS_SHIPPING_AGENTS_ACTIVE,IS_ALLOW_HOUSE_COLLECT,MAX_HOUSE
_COLLECT_AMT,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_CURRENCY_GID,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT
_AMT_BASE,PICKUP_ROUTING_SEQUENCE_GID,DROPOFF_ROUTING_SEQUENC
E_GID,DOMAIN_NAME,INSERT_USER,INSERT_DATE,UPDATE_USER,UPDATE_DA
TE) values (?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?)</sqlString>
<ProcessCount>1</ProcessCount>
<ErrorCount>0</ErrorCount>
<SkipCount>0</SkipCount>
</ProcessCSV>
</CSVUtil>
</CSVUtilServletHelper>
Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File

Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File
You successfully imported a new corporation into OTM using a CSV file.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File

Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM
Make sure the corporation in your CSV file now exists in OTM.
1. In OTM, click Shipment Management > Power Data.
2. Click Location > Corporations.
3. Enter a Corporation ID of SOUTH.
You should see the Corporations results page with an entry of CORE###.SOUTHWEST
TRUCKING.
5. Click the ID to view your new corporation.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM

Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM
You verified that the new corporation of SOUTHWEST TRUCKING exists in your domain.
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM

Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs

Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates

Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template
Copying a Static Trip Template
1. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Ground Schedule.
2. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP BASE.
4. Mark the check box.

5. Click Actions > Copy Ground Schedule.
6. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC.
 Note the Schedule Type. The schedule type differentiates between the different
concepts of ground schedules in a rate service and trip templates. It is also here
you decide whether to create a static or a dynamic trip template.
 Note the Frequency. All trip templates assume you work with a weekly schedule. You
specify for what days of the week OTM should create trips based on your trip s a
template.
) h a
o m
ecฺ should
 Note the Service Provider ID. Each trip template is specific to one service provider.
a c l d eฺ
 Note the Equipment Group ID. This controls what equipment group
use when creating trips for this trip template. r
o Gu
OTM
i
 Note the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box. This u tt@ whether
controls e n t OTM should
t h
allow you to move more weight, volume, and transport im handling
tud units to a trip than
n
the equipment group allows. If OTM cannotafit your order S
is release on a specific trip,
ulik th
OTM tries a later trip.
7. Delete the Discontinue Date. thik
ฺh use
(k ar sDate. e toOTM only uses trip templates that have

tt cen
Note that there is no Discontinue
u
m
an active time window.
hi icon)
8. Click Edit (the tpencil le li
each tripik
n
a erab
next to the second stop. You must specify at least two stops in
u l template.
s f
 HNote the n
ik tra Sequence Number and Stop Number. The sequence number is just a unique
a rth non- identifier while the stop number determines in what order OTM should use the stops.
K  Note the Location ID. This is the location of this stop. Since this is a static trip
template, OTM disregards any stop times on your location.
 Note the Stop Requirement Type of MANDATORY. OTM can delete OPTIONAL stops
from a trip if no order release uses this location. OTM always keeps MANDATORY
stops on a trip even if the stop seems to be unnecessary.
 Note the Allow Pickup check box, Max Pickup Weight, and Max Pickup Volume fields.
OTM uses pickup and delivery constraints to limit what order releases you can add to
a trip.
The equipment constraints you enter on the trip template level are independent of
the stop level constraints. For example, OTM uses both Allow Pickup and Allow
Delivery constraints even if you select the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box.
 Note the Repetition Schedule Activity ID. For each stop, you must specify both
an ARRIVE and a DEPART time.
 Note the Day Adjustment. If you generate a trip for December 1, a day adjustment of
1 means that the trip will arrive December 2.
 Note the Hour Adjustment and Minute Adjustment. These define the time of day.

s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template
Creating a Dynamic Trip Template
Dynamic trip templates are similar to static trip templates so we will focus on what is different
compared to static trip templates.
3. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP DYNAMIC.

4. Select a Schedule Type of DYNAMIC TRIP.
5. Mark the checkboxes for Monday through Friday.
6. Enter a Service Provider ID of TT99.
7. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT DRY VAN.
 Controls what equipment group OTM should use when creating trips for this
s a
trip template.
) h a
 Note the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box.
o m
lecฺ eฺ
Since a dynamic trip template specifies no stop times, OTM must estimate stop times for
c
ra uid
the trip. Depending on the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box, OTM can do one of
o
the following:
@ calculation
tttime n t G
 Feed max volume and max weight into the variable stop
im u d e for each
stop. (Worst case estimation) h
nt on the St u
l k a i s
iinto the variable
h
 Divide the effective volume and effective
u
ฺh use
weight
t equipment group with the
number of stops and feed those values
h ik stop time calculation for
(k aofrt7 H.se to
each stop. (Average estimation)
8. Enter a Start Time Adjustment
u t trip.eThe
teach n adjustment is relative to midnight of each day the
m
hi For bexample,
This is the start time for li c
trip template n
a t
starts.
a le to start each trip at 8:00AM, enter 0D 8H 0M. OTM will
u k
add thelistop times
s feron each stop location to derive stop times.
ik
9. Click H NewrStop
a n at the bottom of the page.
t
th Enterona -Sequence Number of 1.
r10.
K a  n Note the Drive Time From Prev Stop. For each stop in your dynamic trip template, you
must specify the drive time between stops. OTM calculates the trip stop times as:
Location N Drive Time Location N+1
Depart Arrive time= Depart time=

time =depart time = arrive time +
at prev. stop + fixed stop time +
drive time variable stop time
Note that you control what weights and volumes OTM should use for the variable
stop time with the Ignore Equipment Constraints check box.
 Marking the check box expands the stop times the most, a worst case scenario.

 Clearing the check box expands the stop times with an average weight and
volume.
11. Enter a Stop Number of 1.
 OTM hides the Drive Time From Prev Stop field. You leave the drive time empty for the
first stop, since you are not driving to your first stop.
Instead the depart time from your first stop is the Start Time Adjustment.
12. Enter a Location ID of JEWELPOOL.
13. Select a Stop Requirement Type of MANDATORY.

14. Mark Allow Pickup.
 OTM uses pickup and delivery constraints to limit what order releases you can add to
a trip.
The equipment constraints you enter on the trip template level are independent of
the stop level constraints. For example, OTM uses both Allow Pickup and Allow
s
Delivery constraints even if you mark the Ignore Equipment Capacity checkbox. a
) h a
om
c leฺc eฺ
OTM displays the Ground Schedule Manager page with the new stop added.
o ra uid
u tt@ ent G
n thim Stud
ulika this
th ikฺh use
(k ar se to
utt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering
Creating an Itinerary for Trips
2. Enter an Itinerary ID of MI-MI TL.

5. Click Copy Itinerary at the top of the page.
6. Enter an Itinerary ID of TRIP ITINERARY.
7. Select an Itinerary Type of ACTIVE.
8. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the page.
9. Click List Legs at the bottom of the page.
10. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the leg.
s a
 Note the Rate Offering ID. As always, you need matching rates, to be able to
) h a
execute your shipments or trips. Often you have only one rate that has been
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
negotiated specifically for this milk run, so you can refer to it directly from your
ora what id
itinerary leg.
Note the Equipment Assignment Type. Your trip template @ G uequipment

u tt ent
specifies
im Profile
OTM must use so you should select the option No Equipment.
thGroup tudID. Your trip template

n
In the Compatibility section, note the Equipment
ka S
li
something in the Equipment GroupฺhProfile ID.e t
specifies what equipment OTM must use.
u his requires you to enter
Still, this page
11. Enter a Ground Schedule ID ofrTRIP th ikSTATIC

o uinsthe Schedules section.
a sSchedule
(kGround e t
12. Click Save to the right of tthe
u t c e n ID field.

him
Note the Ground
t e
Schedule
l li ID. You must refer to at least one static or dynamic trip
templaten b find what trips to put your orders on.
13. Click u i
Save k a here
a
for OTM
r
l at thesfbottom
to
e of the page.
H n
r
14. ik
th - tra at the top of the page.
Click Finished
n
no the confirmation page.
Ka 15. Close
Viewing a Rate for Trips
17. Enter a Rate Offering ID of TT99.
19. Click the ID.
20. Click the TRIP link in the Rate Service ID field.
Even though this page requires you to specify a rate service on your rate offering,
OTM uses your trip template instead of your rate service to calculate your transit time.

Itinerary/Leg
Rate Offering
Rate Service
Trip Template
Unused Transit Time
s a
information
) h a
om
c
Tripslecฺ eฺ
ora uid
21. Close the Rate Service page.
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

Appendix C3: Working with Templates
s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Appendix C3: Working with Templates

Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips
Based on your trip template, you generate trips (empty shipments) for a certain time
period. These dates determine how many trips OTM creates:
 Schedule Cutoff Time –Displays how far into the future you have already generated trips for
the specified trip template.
 Generating Start Time and Generating End Time – Each time you run the Generate
Shipments action, you specify the date for your first trip and your last trip. You can specify
the time period as week number and year or as start date plus duration.
If your cutoff time is… Then OTM

generates…
Earlier than your generating time period Trips from your cutoff
time to the end of your
Cutoff Generating Generating
s a
Time Start Time End Time
) h a generating time period
o m
c lecฺ eฺ
ra uid
Generating Time Period
o G your cutoff
In your generating time period
u tt@ Trips n t from
e to the end of your
Generating
thim tudtime
Cutoff Time Generating
Start Time
lik an his S generating time periodEnd Time
ik ฺhu use t
a rth to
Generating Time Period
tt (k nse
im u
Later than your generating li
timec eperiod No new trips
th
n rabl e
ika Generating Generating
ul nsfe
Cutoff Time
H
ik n-tra
Start Time End Time
r th
Ka OTM no generates trips from the cutoff time no matter when you specify to start generating
always
trips. This ensures that you generate all trips for every week. This is true even if you delete
trips you have generated previously.
If you choose to work with start dates and durations, consider the time of day for your start
date. If the generating time period ends at a time of day that is before the last stop time on your
trip template, OTM does not generate a trip for that day. If you work with week numbers
instead, the time of day is always midnight.
Generating Trips
5. Click Actions > Generate Shipments.
OTM displays the Generate Shipments page.
6. Enter a From Date of next Monday.
7. Enter a To Date of next Friday.

8. Click Ok.
OTM displays the Generate Shipments page. This page shows the Ground Schedule
ID and Shipments Expected.
9. Click Continue.
OTM displays the Ground Schedule Results page.
10. Click Refresh until you see a time in the Process End Time field.
11. How many shipments were built? There should be 5.
12. Click the link for shipments built.

OTM displays the Shipments Built page.
13. Close the Shipments Built page.
14. Close the Ground Schedule Results page.
16. Click the General tab.
s a
) h a
om
19. lecฺ eฺ
Note the first five shipments OTM generated and their estimated start time.
c
Shipment ID Start Time ora uid
u tG
tt@ enYork
him
010### (shipment ID 1) YYYY-MM-DD 05:00 AM America/New
n t S tud York
010### (shipment ID 2)
l a hi s
YYYY-MM-DD 05:00
ik05:00
AM America/New
ฺh useAMt America/New York
YYYY-MM-DD
ik u
a rth to 05:00 AM America/New York
YYYY-MM-DD
k nse 05:00 AM America/New York
010### (shipment ID 5) tt ( YYYY-MM-DD
im u li c e
a n th ble
a shipment.
erfirst
liklink forsfthe
u
20. Click the
H the Status
21. k
th i Click
- t ran button.
r  noNote n the OTM Status of RESERVATION_OPEN
Ka 22. Close the Statuses page.
24. Click the pencil icon next to the first stop to edit it.
 Note the Planned Arrival Time and Planned Departure Time. These match what was
entered on the ground schedule.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases
1. Click Order Management > Order Release> Order Release.
2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIP.
3. Enter a Total Gross Weight of 10000 LB.

5. Mark the check boxes next to the Order Releases: TRIP1-001, TRIP2-001, TRIP3-001.
6. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan – Buy.
7. Click OK.
8. Wait a few seconds.
9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page.
10. Note the following information.
s a
Question Answer
) h a
om
ecฺ eฺ
Shipments Built 1
c l
Total Number of Stops 7
o ra uid
Orders Planned 3
u tt@ ent G
Service Provider ID TT99
n thim Stud
u lika this
11. Click the link in the Shipments Built ifield.
th kฺh use
12. Click the Shipment ID.
(k ar se to
13. Click Status on the right u ttside ofcthe
e npage near the top.
m
hi values. li

n
Note the status
a t
a b leOTM leaves the RESERVATION status as OPEN.
uthelikStops
14. Close the Statuses
s ferpage.
i H
15. Click
r an
kNote the-tfollowing tab.
a th
r non
16. information:
K Location Arrive Time Depart Time
JEWELPOOL 5:00 5:10
CHAIN 6:30 6:35
CLASP 7:00 7:05
AMBER 7:35 7:40
JADE 8:10 8:15
OPAL 9:45 9:50
JEWELPOOL 10:20 10:25
17. Close the Buy Shipment page and bulk planning page.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases

Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips
Releasing the Trip
1. Click Order Management > Order Release> Order Release.
2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIP1.
3. Click Search.
4. Right-click on the ID TRIP1-001 and select Related Buy Shipments.

5. Mark the check box.
6. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Utilities > Release Schedule Instance.
OTM rates your trip, calculates shipment stop times, and removes unused, optional stops.
7. Close the Release Schedule Instance confirmation page.
8. Click the ID of the shipment.
9. Note the shipment ID.
s a
h a
) For

o m
OTM removes all stops marked as optional and have no pickup or delivery activity.
leฺc eฺ
a static trip template with only mandatory stops like this, there is no difference.
c
11. Click the Identification tab, the first tab.
o ra uid
12. Click the Status button.
u tt@ ent G

t
Note the status values. OTM sets the RESERVATION
n him statusS tutod CLOSED.
13. Close the statuses page.
ulika this
th ikฺh use
( k ar se to
u tt cen
n thi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K
Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips

Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip
Manually Assigning an Order Release to a Trip
2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIPEXTRA.

5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Move Order
to Existing Shipment.
OTM displays the Move Order to Shipment page.
6. Click the Select Shipment option.
7. Enter the Shipment ID that you noted previously.
8. Mark Consolidate Equipment.
s a
9. Click OK.
) h a
10. Click the ID.
om
11. Scroll down to the Shipment Stops section.
c lecฺ eฺ
12. Click the plus sign next to stop number 2.
ora uid
tt@ ent G
13. Note that a new ship unit TRIPEXTRA has been added to the shipment.
u
14. Close the Buy Shipment page.
nthim Stud
ulika this
15. Close the Order – Move to Shipment page.
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K

s a
) h a
om
c lecฺ eฺ
ora uid
u tt@ ent G
nthim Stud
ulika this
thikฺh use
(kar se to
u tt cen
nthi ble li
m
u lika sfera
ik H ran
a rth non-t
K


racl eฺco m) h asa ent Gui deฺ: OTM 6.3 Core Competence

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

racl eฺco m) h asa ent Gui deฺ: OTM 6.3 Core Competence

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Restricted Rights Notice

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

OTM 6.3 Core Competence Activity Guide ....................................................................................................1-1

Lesson 2: OTM Terminology ..........................................................................................................................1-6

nthim Stud Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved

K a Solution – Creating Saved Queries ............................................................................................................1-

Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments ....................................................................................................1-77

Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles ...........................................................................................1-133

a r non 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload .....................................................................................1-163

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

K a Solution – Re-sequencing Stops ................................................................................................................1-227

Student Guide Table of Contents

Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel...........................................................................................1-255

th ikPractice - tr an 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules.......................................................................1-283

a r non 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules........................................................................................1-284

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File...............................................................................................1-319

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Before You Begin This Course

 Explain the transport process of your company

How This Course Is Organized

Release 6.3 t hi ble l

i H an Management Data Management Guide E38426-02

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

a rth non-t FTI ODI Interfaces Guide

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Course Overview

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: OTM Terminology

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Navigating OTM

3. Enter your User Name.

The main menu.

Toggles the main

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM

OTM displays information such as user, version, URL, and database.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM

http://<servername>:7777/GC3/glog.webserver.servlet.umt.Login. Due to issues with

k a eonratheb top menu bar.

8. Close the OTM Information page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM

Logging into OTM

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Logging into OTM

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.